Home

R&S®FSV-K76/K77 3GPP TD-SCDMA - rohde

1. dJ Ux SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span ON or sets the value of the center frequency entered via SENSe FREQuency CENTer OFF Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt Range 1 to 100 RST 10 Default unit PCT Example FREQ CENT ST
2. d s pue SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example CDP LEV ADJ Adjusts the reference level Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower MMAX lt ModType gt This command defines the highest modulation to be considered in the automatic channel search In low SNR environments it may be necessary to limit the channel search to lower modulations than 64QAM Parameters lt ModType gt QPSK Consider QPSK modulation only PSK8 Consider QPSK and 8PSK modulation QAM16 Consider QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation QAM64 Consider QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 64QAM modulation RST QAM64 Example SENS CDP MMAX PSK8 assume QPSK and 8PSK modulations only for the automatic channel search Mode TDS SENSe CDPower MSHift lt numeric value gt This command sets the maximum number of midamble shifts Parameters lt numeric value gt Range 2 to 16 Increment 2 RST 16 Example CDP MSH 10 Sets the maximum number of midamble shifts to 10 Mode TDS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 179 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Com
3. O O Y mw RF Measurements If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on not all range settings can be set automatically Remote command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Filter Type Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the filter type for this range For details on filters see also chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FILTer TYPE on page 190 RBW lt Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the RBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth RESolution on page 189 VBW Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the VBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo on page 189 Sweep Time Mode Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO on page 195 Sweep Time Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the sweep time value for the range Remote command SENSe
4. u um eg DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MINimum numeric value This command defines the lower limit of the y axis in the indicated measurement window Suffix n 1 4 window Parameters lt numeric value gt The unit and range depend on the result display RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DBM DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 DBM Defines a y axis with a minimum value of 60 dBm and a maximum value of 0 dBm Mode CDMA EVDO TDS DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SySTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix lt n gt irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value the unit depends on the result display RST depends on the result display Operating Manual 1173 074
5. Sweep Points erre eiit oret eene tete eee 102 Sweep Points remote control Sweep Time Sweeptime Auto remote control 217 Threshold remote control sssssusse 165 Trace 1234 5 6 remote control we 172 Trace Mode remote control sssss 174 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 Index Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg ee ceee ceeeeeeneeeeeeeees 46 Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 214 Trg Gate Source remote control Trigger Holdoff remote control Trigger Out Low High remote control Trigger Polanity arsine eerie tens Unit remote control sss Use Zoom Limits remote control Video BW Auto remote control Video BW Manual remote control Video Output i Weight ADJ On Off remote control Weighting Filter remote control Weight TX On Off remote control X Demod BW KO poli EE X RBW remote control ae ds 2 PO e X Span remote control ssssssssssss x Axis Range D x Axis Range remote control ssuss x Axis Ref EE x Axis Ref Level remote control m D y Axis Max Value n se seen y Axi
6. J f m eG Code Domain Analysis Peak Code Domain Error 1 Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 6 Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high for all slots Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Code Domain Error Display Configuration Starts the Code Domain Error Power result display This result display shows the difference in power of the test signal and an ideally gener ated reference signal In the diagram the codes are plotted on the x axis The number of codes corresponds to the base spreading factor The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power for each code Since it is an error power active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Code Domain Error Power 1 Clrw Start Code 1 1 Code Stop Code 16 The power values of the active and inactive channels are displayed in different colors e Yellow active cha
7. INPUECOUPIN O e P INPut DIQ CDEVice INPut DIQ RANGO AUTO ee teet ecrire elei sot bap ia dads a Asad deed Nur DiORANGe COUblmg enne neh nnns sn tents std nnns sen nnns ss snnt nsn n eres sedens INPut DIQ RANGe UPPar 5 rire E eere eege dee Jl Tel le MER TR IN EE JS helle NN EE Nur DIOGbRATe AUTO MIN Di gi C INPUGEAT Ti AUT Osi E INPut EATT STATe lee RN KR ll Tall le EE IN PUt SEL CG eS INS Trument NSELO e e INSTrumentESEL6ct uch t d ee e de ofa i rennes dt eee kde de e eed MMEMory STORexn LIST ssssssssssssessseseeeee eene nennt et nnr te dn nns s edt rns ii nnns sint rns s entres sent rn sien nnns nnn ll via Ee ER T EE PROP OUTPUBIF SOURCE c E A OUTPut TRIGger STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition esses eene enne nnnnrtnennr nennen snnt ntn seni 219 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EMENI J 2 2 coitu eta oett EES ert bye rete a ere EHE ape eue Pago 219 SYSTenm DISPlay UPDate x etri cs rti crac oie d rccte oci Eea e pda nanc ck gait desir ee Ea ER aes 238 BR e ER RICK 220 TRIGger n SEQuence BBPower HOLDOff esses ener nene neret eren et rns etnies 231 H Operating Manual 1
8. sess C No remote control m 132 134 CCDF remote control sssussss 161 162 CF Stepsize remote control sssss 200 Channel Bandwidth eese 75 Channel Bandwidth remote control 203 204 Channel Settings cccccccceceeceeeteeeeecneeeeeeeeeeenees Channel Spacing remote control Chan e ET Chan Pwr Hz remote control sssssss Clear Write Continue Single Sweep remote control 235 Continuous Sweep remote control Cont Meas remote Control Coupling CET CP ACP MC ACLR remote control VE ee EE Default Coupling esses Default Settings Default Settings remote control Delete Range iiit iet ertet 70 Delete Range remote control 190 Deviation Lin Log remote control 176 Edit ACLR Limit remote control 143 144 145 146 147 Edit Power Classes onere nins 73 Edit Reference Range eneren 71 72 Edit Reference Range remote control 186 187 El Atten Mode Auto Man o n Fast ACLR On Off sisside iriiria Fast ACLR On Off remote control r ege Filter Type remote control Frequency Offset Full Span remote control
9. A c n Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 48 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 48 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VS
10. Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 84 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions muU P eQ QR RF Measurements 0 5 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the resolution bandwidth Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 201 x Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage 96 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 x RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage 96 of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 96 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 zCenter CF Steps
11. Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 195 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MER MALO T 4 6 3 3 SENSe Subsystem Example ESP RANG3 SWE TIME AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer lt TransducerName gt This command sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a trans ducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt TransducerName gt string name of the transducer Example ESP RANG1 TRAN test Sets the transducer called test for range 1 SENSe ESPectrum RRANge This command returns the current position number of the reference range Example ESP RRAN Returns the current position number of the reference range SENSe ESPectrum R
12. STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis Return values Result Example Usage Mode If the result is ON an error occured Details can be obtained using STATUS QUEStionable SYNC EVENt RST OFF STAT QUES SYNC COND Query only TDS STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis The value can only be read once Example STAT QUES SYNC EVEN Usage Query only Mode TDS Bit no Meaning 0 Not used in R amp S FSV K76 K77 applications 1 K76 Frame sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application The reasons for this can be e Invalid frequency e Invalid level e Invalid scrambling code e Invalid max number of MA Shifts Cell e Invalid values for INVERT Q or SIDEBAND INV e Invalid signal on input 2to 14 Not used in the R amp S FSV K76 K77 applications 15 This bit is always 0 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 219 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands TRACe Subsystem 4 8 TRACe Subsystem This chapter describes the TRACe n DATA command and its characteristics for the measurement application TRACe lt n gt DATA LIST TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACEA block numeric value This comm
13. esses eene SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP SENS e ESPectium RRANGge 2 1 tir oct pe t tack area te duci eoe e ee de dare de dE aval IGENGe EGbechumHivbe nennen nen nnns sete rns sed n renti ine ress s dn rent sinn rni sii nents seni SENSe FREQUENCY C SENSe FREQu n cy CENTer S TEP reir ederet rne desee e ena en E edet DARE HT AEAEE EXER YER LE RD YER SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK IGENGe IEbREOuencv CENTer STEP UNK FACTor nennen nennen nnns SENSe FREQUENCY OF FSetiiscccicsiscccesscessiscocesconstesnieneesseedecsatetscssesectsstcasiessaactashisnzeapdesienecensaseusscdideeteisege SENSe FREQuUENnCY SPANs 3n toic a aaan aa a a n a aaia aea iaae ai N gedd SENSe FREQuency SPAN FUL leis pieirii igea ANE ek ENEE eee bee teda he ad IEN Ge IEbREOuencv START SENSe FREQuency STOP SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs esses enne nnne nennen nen nreeneret rsen nre e nennen senes SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe esseesssseeseeeeene nnne nenne nenne nnns nnns tne nnne enne IEN Ge IPOWer AC Hanne AUTO Me SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel eese eee SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALT ernate lt channel gt SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel sess entren SENSe
14. 157 Max Hold WE Mech Atten Auto Mech Atten Auto remote control Mech Atten Manual seen Mech Atten Manual remote control Miti Hold E Preamp On Off ssessseeee Preamp On Off remote control 230 Ixef Level 5 eet rentrer ere teens 19 39 88 Ref Level remote control eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 Res BW Auto m D Res BW Manual siisii titiraa 93 RE Attn AUIO iaoiai osian 40 91 RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual sese RF Atten Manual remote control 225 Save remote control zs Select 1 2 3 4 remote control ssss 158 Single Meas remote control ss 235 Single Sweep Single Sweep remote control EY rp Sweep Count remote control RUE I ei Sweep Time remote control Sweeptime Auto 95 100 Sweeptime Manual aeee eee 87 94 100 Sweeptime Manual remote control 217 Sweep Type D Trace Mode remote control suusse 172 Trg Gate Source remote control 231 233 Trigger Offset Trigger TEE Video BW Auto irapada aiiin aiaiai 94 Video BW Manual MWIGW acces 45 106 Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis
15. sssssss 202 Gate Delay remote control sssss 213 Gated Trigger On Off Gated Trigger remote control Gate Length remote control sssssss Gate Mode Lvl Edge remote control x Gate e E Gate Ranges remote control Grid Abs Rel Grid Abs Rel remote control ss IF Output IF Video remote control Input 50 W 75 W remote control i Insert after Range sess Insert after Range remote control Insert before Range Insert before Range remote control L st Span EE rD Limit Chk On Off remote control Limits On Off remote control Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control 138 Load Standard Mari al nier tert ana Manual remote control sssssesesesss Marker 1 remote control Marker 1 to 4 remote control 141 156 157 Marker 2 remote control Marker 3 remote control Marker 4 remote control Marker Norm Delta remote control 140 Marker to Trace remote control Max Hold E Meas Start Stop 0 eee essen Meas Start Stop remote control Meas Time Auto 00 0 ceeeeee renee eeeneeeeeeee Meas Time Manual Min remote control Next Min remote control Ne
16. Predefined standards are selected using the CP ACLR Standard softkey or the Standard GUI Parameter SCPI Parameter EUTRA LTE Square EUTRA LTE Square EUTRa EUTRA LTE Square RRC EUTRA LTE Square RRC REUTRa W CDMA 3 84 MHz forward W CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3G W CDMA 3 84 MHz reverse W CDMA 3GPP REV RW3G CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD FIS95a CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD RIS95a CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0 CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0 CDMA J STD008 forward CDMA J STD008 FWD F19C FJ008 CDMA J STD008 reverse CDMA J STD008 REV R19C RJO08 CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1 CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV RIS95c1 CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000 S2CD TD SCDMA forward TD SCDMA FWD FTCD TCDMa TD SCDMA reverse TD SCDMA REV RTCD WLAN 802 11A WLAN 802 11A AWLan WLAN 802 11B WLAN 802 11B BWLan WiMAX WiMAX WiMAX WIBRO WIBRO WIBRO GSM GSM GSM RFID 14443 RFID 14443 RFID14443 TETRA TETRA TETRA PDC PDC PDC PHS PHS PHS CDPD CDPD CDPD APCO 25 Phase 2 APCO 25 P2 PAPCo25 TEE EE Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 121 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission channel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in st
17. 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent channels TX is only available for the multi carrier ACLR measurement When you change the bandwidth for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all subsequent channels of the same type The transmission channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard see chapter 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 122 e Measurements in zero span see Fast ACLR On Off softkey are performed in the zero span mode The channel limits are indicated by vertical lines For measurements requiring channel bandwidths deviating from those defined in the selected standard the IBW method is to be used e With the IBW method see Fast ACLR On Off softkey the channel bandwidth limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of the channel center frequency Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 59 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m O 9 8 t RF Measurements If measuring according to the IBW method Fast AC
18. Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 166 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA numeric values This command sets the parameters of the channel table selected or created with the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME command Parameters numeric values To define a channel one row in the channel table you have to enter eight values in the following order channel type code class code number modulation type midamble shift status reserved 1 reserved 2 channel type The channel type is coded with numbers 1 Midamble 2 DPCH 3 P CCPCH 4 S CCPCH 5 FPACH 6 PRACH 7 PICH lt code class gt 0 4 lt code number gt 0 spreading factor 1 lt modulation type gt 0 invalid for midamble 1 QPSK 2 8PSK 3 16QAM 4 64QAM lt midamble shift gt 1 16 lt status gt 0 inactive 1 active reserved 1 always 0 reserved lt reserved 2 gt always 0 reserved RST RST value Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects or creates channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB DATA ZS4 1 1 1 1 0 0 2 4 2 1 1 1 0 0 Defines two data channels with QPSK modulation Mode TDS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 167 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PEMGNEGEENMPCUNMMCLQ H M n ng
19. XPOW CDP Code Domain Power result display absolute XPOW CDP RAT Code Domain Power result display relative XPOW CDEP Code Domain Error Power result display XTIMe CDPower BSTRream Channel Bitstream result display XTIMe CDPower COMPosite CONSt Composite Constellation result display XTIMe CDPower COMPosite EVM Composite EVM result display XTIMe CDPower ERRor CTABle Channel Table result display XTIMe CDPower ERRor PCDomain Peak Code Domain Error result display XTIMe CDPower ERRor SUMMary Result Summary result display XTIMe CDPower MACCuracy Composite EVM result display XTIMe CDPower PVSLot Channel Power vs Slot result display absolute XTIMe CDPower PVSLot RATio Channel Power vs Slot result display relative XTIMe CDPower PVSYmbol Power vs Symbol result display XTIMe CDPower SYMBOoIl CONSt Channel Constellation result display XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM EVM vs Symbol result display RST XPOW CDP RAT CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP MACC Starts the Composite EVM result display in window 2 TDS CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Commands This chapter describes commands of the CALCulate MARKer subsystem that are specific to the measurement application 129 CALCulate Subsystem CALOCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower BTGIRE Su 130 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonbOWerMODE enne nnns 132 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonbOWer RE Gut 132 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWe
20. RST OFF Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 CDP STSL ON Activates synchronizing to the midamble of slot 7 Mode TDS SENSe CDPower STSLot MODE Mode This command selects the phase reference for downlink measurements see Sync To downlink K77 on page 23 Parameters Mode CODE MA CODE The instrument synchronizes to the code channel of the selected slot MA The instrument synchronizes to the midamble of the selected slot RST MA Example CDP STSL MODE CODE Activates code channel synchronizing Mode TDS SENSe CDPower STSLot ROTate Mode By default the R amp S FSV K76 77 determines one phase reference for all midambles and code channels of a data slot If this command is activated phase rotations between the code channels are allowed Each code channel gets its own phase reference from the associated midamble according to section AA 2 of the standard document 3GPP TS 25 221 If the associated midamble is missing the common phase reference is used for this code channel Parameters Mode ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP STSL ROT ON Allows phase rotations between code channels Mode TDS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 182 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PEMGNEGEEMGMCUNMMCLQA l 4 6 2 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIM
21. SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt Number This command selects the number of carrier signals The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 134 Parameters lt Number gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH TXCH COUN 3 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 210 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MUERE CULO R s X M 4n SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth Percentage This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement see SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 207 Parameters Percentage 10 to 99 9PCT RST 99PCT Example POW BWID 95PCT SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power mea surement The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center frequencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to zero span and back Depending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with characteristic or very steep sided channel filters are used for band limitation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON SENSe POWer NCORre
22. Sweep List Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask See Sweep List on page 67 Add Remove Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined Up to four power classes can be defined The number of active power classes affects the availability of the items of the Used Power Classes dropdown menu Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 150 Load Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to select an XML file which includes the desired standard specifica tion For details on the provided XML files refer to chapter 3 3 8 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 116 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard on page 188 Save As Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Save As Standard dialog box in which the currently used SEM settings and parameters can be saved and exported into an xml file Enter the name of the file in the File name field For details on the structure and contents of the XML file refer to chap ter 3 3 7 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 111 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe on page 189 Meas Start Stop Spectrum Emission Mask Aborts restarts the current measurement and displays the status Start The measurement is currently running
23. surement screens via this check box The size of the screens depends on the number of active screens For example if four screens are active each screen takes up a quarter of the display size Hace pecu cup E C LC Dci c c peuunu M oE Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 28 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RLAEEERMNMM 3 Eee Code Domain Analysis Item Description Result diagram for Screen A B C D Choose the result diagram for each screen Find a short description of each result display below Screen Focus The currently active screen is indicated by a blue frame Trace and marker settings can only be changed for the active screen Changing the focus and screen size is just like in the base unit Code Domain Power Display Configuration Starts the Code Domain Power CDP result display By default the scaling is relative This result display determines the power of all codes of a specific channel and plots it in a diagram The x axis represents the code number The number of codes depends on the channel type Each bar in the diagram represents one code up to a maximum of 16 the maximum spreading factor Codes are always sorted in ascending order and pro jected to a spreading factor of 16 The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the power of
24. 2 e teuer edere re er de ea kid Ede ete sue eee eae REIR 52 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CDEN 53 Power CR 53 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Kik 54 Softkeys of the Measurement Menu 54 Softkeys of the Frequency Mem 83 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements sse 86 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements 87 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu 92 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 3 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Contents 3 2 7 6 3 2 7 7 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 9 3 3 10 3 3 11 4 1 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 4 2 3 5 4 2 3 6 4 2 3 7 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 99 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Meaeurements cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 Further Information criteri rere fesedeseeceteceusnecteeesavieelieeesesseets 103 Detector Overview nennen nenne iaiki nennen nns 104 Ir c AnEeu 105 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type 107 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters n 107 Ranges and Range Gettngs eene 109 ASCII File Export Fomat enne enne res 110 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML FPiles 111 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 116 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements 2 ecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeneees 119 Predefined C
25. 3 1 1 5 Code Domain Analysis Meas Time Auto Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 184 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automat ically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 184 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Application for CDA measurements For all other measure ments the softkeys are described in chapter 3 2 7 6 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu on page 99 COMMODUS SWEEP RE 43 So EE e E A T A T EE T TT 43 Continue Single SWEIBD ET 44 SWVC p COUN E 44 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep
26. Activates the use of an RRC filter ESP FILT ALPH 0 5 Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter to 0 5 SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed State This command activates Fast SEM mode to accelerate spurious emission mask meas urements For details see chapter 3 3 9 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measure ments on page 119 Note that in Fast SEM mode the following parameters cannot be changed in all ranges Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 187 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Se SS ae c Pn SENSe Subsystem e Filter type see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FILTer TYPE on page 190 e RBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution on page 189 e VBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 189 e Sweep Time Mode see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO on page 195 e Sweep Time see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME on page 195 e Reference level see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel on page 195 e RF Att Mode see SENSe ESPect rum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 192 e RHfAttenuation see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 191 e Preamp see SENSe
27. Am geiw Code Domain Analysis Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The application is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the applica
28. CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table Select the channel table you want to delete using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME command Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB DEL 2 42 1 1 1 1 0 0 2 4 2 1 1 1 0 0 Deletes channel table CTAB 1 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle MSHift numeric value This command sets the maximum number of midamble shifts in the channel table Parameters numeric value 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 RST 16 Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB MSH 4 Sets the maximum number of midamble shifts to 4 Mode TDS CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME lt ChannelTable gt This command selects an existing channel table or creates a new one Use this command to edit the channel table To use a channel table for a measurement use the CONFig ure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt ChannelTable gt lt string gt name of the channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table by that name is created Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle ORDer CODE MIDamble gt This command selects sorting of the channel table in code or
29. R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m X X OO C P Further Information File contents header and data section Description Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results values List of results 3 3 7 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of the XML standard Below the child nodes attributes and structure defined for the data import is described Build your own XML files according to these conventions because the R amp S FSV can only interpret XML files of a known structure For example files look in the C Nr sNinstrNsem std directory Spectrum Emission Mask Standard W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL Tx Power 47 93 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Range Low Range Up RBW Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ALimit__ 1 0 Bu M 4 000 MH 1 0 4 k d m iii4dB dB 000 MH 0 MH Fig 3 2 Example Spectrum emission mask standard file PowerClass 39 43 xml Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R amp S FSV is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the scree
30. 0 inactive 1 midamble 2 DPCH 3 P CCPCH 4 S CCPCH 5 FPACH 6 PDSCH 7 PICH Code number of the channel range is 1 16 The number of channels depends on the spreading factor Maximum value of the EVM Average value of the EVM Frequency Error in Hz 223 R amp S FSV K76 K77 lt ciqimbalance gt and lt iqoffset gt lt level gt lt maccuracy gt lt midd1 gt and lt midd2 gt lt midamble shift gt lt modulation type gt lt pcderror gt lt pd1 gt and lt pd2 gt lt pdata gt lt pmidamble gt lt power detection gt lt rho gt lt sfactor gt lt slot gt lt srate gt lt tframe gt lt validity gt Usage Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 Remote Control Commands TRACe Subsystem IQ Imbalance and IQ Offset in 96 Power level of the channel in dB or dBm The range is Composite EVM in 96 Power offset between sum power of channels belonging to midamble k only data field 1 2 and power of midamble k Midamble Shift of the channel Modulation type of the channel 0 invalid for midamble 1 QPSK 2 8PSK 3 16QAM 4 64QAM Peak Code Domain Error in dB Power of the data parts over all channels in dB The range is 00 c0 Mean power of both data parts P1 and P2 over all channels in dBm The range is o Power of the midamble in dB The range is 0 inactive channel 1 active cha
31. Add Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Inserts a new channel below the one selected For a description of the parameters of the channel refer to the Channel Table Settings softkey The default values for a new channel are Channel Type Midamble Walsh Ch SF 2 64 Data Rate kbps 19 2 automatically calculated Modulation QPSK Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 25 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions a L U JP z Code Domain Analysis Midamble Shift State Off Domain Conflict No automatically determined To change the channel type use the dropdown menu that opens when selecting high lighting the Channel Type field that you want to change Modulation settings are changed in the same way To change the channel number type another channel number in the form ChannelNum ber SpreadingFactor or just the code number in the respective field Confirm the change with the ENTER key To activate or deactivate a channel select the State field and confirm with the ENTER key The R amp S FSV automatically checks for conflicts between two active channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 167 Delete Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel without further notice Meas New Copy Edit Channel Table Se
32. DPCH 2 8 QPSK 7 78 dB DPCH 3 4 8PSK 7 78 dB In this example the command would return the following string Lp 054 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 005 0 005 0 0 e 4p de l 7 78 0 18954 By Oy Oy Oy Ou 2L 3p Ap ly 122854 4 78 3 05 0 Oy 0 Z2 4 2i Sy X Shel By 4e18 3 O0 Oy 0 0 0 p 24 l1 46 9 4A349 Sp He Oy He O D eu 5 li 46 9 43 9 3 0 De 0 Q Q4 De Le 46 9 c43 9 3 0 0 OF 0 Q 4 T Ly 46 9 4 399p Sy Op Oy De cQ y 4p Bp Iy 46 9 43 9 3 0 Oy 0 00 4 13 1 46 9 43 9 3 0 0 0 00 4 14 1 46 9 AAS Dp 3 0 Up Oy O EN p 4 L5 Ly 40 9 43 9 35 Oz 0 0 He 4 Lo Ly 46 9 43 9 37 0y He 90 0 e Result Summary For the Result Summary the command returns 25 values in the following order lt slot gt lt pdata gt lt pd1 gt lt pd2 gt lt pmidamble gt rho lt maccuracy gt lt pcderror gt lt ferror gt lt cerror gt lt tframe gt lt igimbalance gt lt igoffset gt active lt srate gt lt chan nel gt lt sfactor gt lt cdprelative gt lt cdpabsolute gt lt evmrms gt lt evmpeak gt lt reserved1 gt lt reserved2 gt lt reserved3 gt lt reserved4 gt e Power vs Slot For the Power vs Slot result display the command returns three values in the fol lowing order Power vs Slot Absolute slot number gt level in dom gt validity Power vs Slot Relative slot number level in db validity The number of triplets
33. ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME on page 195 Ref Level Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the reference level for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel on page 195 RF Att Mode Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 192 RF Attenuator Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the attenuation value for that range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 191 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 68 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions REENEN RF Measurements Preamp Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Switches the preamplifier on or off Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe on page 192 Transd Factor Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer on page 196 L
34. Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO State This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the channel filters available are not set by the automatic coupling Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio to define the ratio RBW span Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available for sweep type FFT Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 197 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt FilterMode gt AUTO The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best measurement results NARRow The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced ref erence level due to a narrower analog prefilter RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BA
35. Y SCALe RLEVel command With the reference level offset lt gt 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Suffix n irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 163 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt Value gt 120dBm to 20dBm RST 20dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Value This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix n selects the screen Parameters Value 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling type of the y axis Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Value gt This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCA
36. lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Enlargens the measurement window to full size SMALI Turns the measurement window back to its default size RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Maximizes measurement window 2 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SSELect This command controls which of the measurement windows is active Select the mea surement window via the numeric suffix Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Example DISP WIND2 SSEL Maximizes measurement window 2 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe State Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 171 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands yy MCLQ JM pa e DISPlay Subsystem Example DISP WIND3 STAT ON Turns on a third measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe
37. on page 107 Channel filters do not support FFT mode e RRC filters For details see chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 107 RRC filters do not support FFT mode e 5 Pole filters The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet 5 Pole filters do not support FFT mode 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are available see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated Table 3 2 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFILter 200 Hz CFILter AO 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz CFiLter 2 kHz CFILter Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 107 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mm Dn Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 2 4 kHz CFILter SSB 2 7 kHz CFILter 3 kHz CFILter 3 4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFILter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDMAone
38. ue CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt Reference gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe State This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The refer ence point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamark
39. K77 Instrument Functions m 3 C RA ii i ii Y RF Measurements Any changes to the range settings in active Symmetric Setup mode lead to symmetrical changes in the other ranges where possible In particular this means e Inserting ranges a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range e Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted e Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accordingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetric Setup mode is on not all range set tings can be set automatically Edit Reference Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Reference Range E x Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Peak Power Channel Power Settings Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Measures the channel power within the reference range
40. Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 95 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m J Jt RF Measurements Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE See SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 217 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 217 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 217 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type
41. Sync Settings This softkey opens the Synchronization Settings dialog box xl Settings Scrambling Code 0 MA Shifts Cell 16 Sync To P CCPCH Midamble Fig 3 1 Syncronization Settings for forward link measurements K76 Scrambling Code Sync Settings Sets the Scrambling Code of the base station Possible values are between 0 and 127 and have to be entered as decimals Remote command SENSe CDPower SCODe on page 180 MA Shift Cells Sync Settings Sets the maximum number of usable midamble shifts of the base station Possible values are in the range from 2 to 16 in steps of 2 midamble shifts If you use a predefined channel table this value is replaced by that of the channel table Remote command SENSe CDPower MSHift on page 179 Sync To forward link K76 Sync Settings Toggles the phase reference P CCPCH By default the R amp S FSV K76 determines the phase reference for all downlink data slots from the downlink pilot channel P CCPCH in slot 0 For some measurements like beamforming or repeater measure ments it might be necessary to apply different phase offsets to each time slot In these timeslots using the P CCPCH as phase reference leads to rotated constellation diagrams and bad EVM results Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 22 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mAEmEIET H H Code Domain Analysis Midamble
42. The R amp S FSV K76 determines the phase reference from the midamble of the selected slot With this method the data slots can be phase rota ted to each other and a degradation of the EVM results can be avoided For a successful synchronization the selected slot must contain at least one data channel with sufficient power Remote command SENSe CDPower STSLot on page 181 Sync To downlink K77 Sync Settings Toggles the phase reference For a successful synchronization the selected slot must contain at least one data channel with sufficient power Code Chan The R amp S FSV K77 determines the phase reference from the code nel channel of the selected slot This is useful when synchronization fails in bad SNR environments For code channel synchronization at least one of the code channels must be QPSK or 8PSK modulated Midamble By default the R amp S FSV K77 determines the phase reference from the midamble of the selected slot With this method the data slots can be phase rotated to each other and a degradation of the EVM results can be avoided Remote command SENSe CDPower STSLot MODE on page 182 Rotate code channel to associated midamble Sync Settings By default the R amp S FSV K76 77 determines one phase reference for all midambles and code channels of a data slot If this option is selected phase rotations between the code channels are allowed Each code channel gets its own phase reference from the
43. The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 197 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW s 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 197 Coupling Ratio Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth This softkey and its submenu is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 96 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m smer RF Measurements RBW VBW Sine 1 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 199 RBW V
44. The range num bers are updated accordingly Suffix range 1 20 range Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 192 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands a R m n ms p wu SENSe Subsystem Parameters Mode AFTer BEFore Example ESP RANG3 INS BEF Inserts a new range before range 3 ESP RANG1 INS AFT Inserts a new range after range 1 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt Level This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Level 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STAR 10 Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the range SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP Level This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Level gt 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STOP 20 Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of t
45. and of the next but one higher and lower adjacent channel alternate channel 2 are measured 12 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and the power of the all higher and lower channels alternate channel 1 to 11 are measured Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 203 Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog to define the channel settings for all channels independant of the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 58 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Channel Setup Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth Channel TX1 14 0 kHz ADJ TX 2 14 0 kHz ALT1 TX3 14 0 kHz ALT2 TX 4 14 0 kHz ALT3 TX 5 14 0 kHz ALT4 TX 6 14 0 kHz ALTS TX 14 0 kHz ALT6 TX8 14 0 kHz ALT TX9 14 0 kHz ALT8 TX 10 14 0 kHz ALT9 TX 11 14 0 kHz ALT10 TX 12 14 0 kHz ALT11 ACLR Reference TX CHANNEL 1 The dialog contains the following tabs Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Bandwidth on page 59 Spacing on page 60 Names on page 61 Weighting Filter on page 61 Limits on page 62 Bandwidth Instrument Functions RF Measurements 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz 14 0 kHz
46. ative levels If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is exceeded the measured value is marked by a preceding asterisk Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe on page 148 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative on page 147 Relative Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 148 CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt OdBc 0dBc CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt STAT ON Absolute Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines an absolute limit Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe on page 148 CALC LIM ACP adjacent channel ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP adjacent channel ABS STAT ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 143 Check Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate the limit to be considered during a limit check The check of both limit values can be activated independently Chan Pwr Hz CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If deactivated the channel power is displayed in dBm If activated the
47. 14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz CFILter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFILter 30 kHz CFILter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFILter 100 kHz CFILter 150 kHz CFILter FM Radio 192 kHz CFILter PHS 200 kHz CFILter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFiLter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone A Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 108 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 1 228 MHz CFiLter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFILter DAB 2MHz CFILter 3 MHz CFiLter 3 75 MHz CFiLter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFILter 20 MHz CFILter 28 MHz CFILter 40 MHz CFILter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately Start and stop frequency RBW VBW Sweep time Sweep points Reference level Attenuator settings Limit values Via the sweep list you define the ranges and their settings For details on settings refer to Sweep List dialog box on page 67 For details on defining the limits masks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The following rules apply to ranges The m
48. 3 range Parameters Value numeric value RST 1 us Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one Sweep Note For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 216 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands a ee AA asu s Pr ee SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep TIME Time This command defines the sweep time The range depends on the frequency span Parameters Time refer to data sheet For R amp S FSV spectrum analyzers with an FMR7 CPU board order no 1091 3204 with R amp S FSV models 1307 9002Kxx only and 1 GByte RAM the maximum capture time is 600 ms Otherwise it is 1s RST AUTO is set to ON Example SWE TIME 10s SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO lt State gt In realtime mode this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms In analyzer mode this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwidth settings If SENSe SWEep TIME is used automatic coupling is switche
49. 4 6 3 7 INSTrument subsystem INSTrument subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text param eters or fixed numbers INSTr menm SEL eel 1 2 ne aE E EEE eased aac eed 177 INSTr mentNSELGGL 3 eoa eter niei apre d ies desea eee ita ade ee MAE Ric e dea M ERAN EENG 177 INSTrument SELect lt Mode gt This command switches between the measurement modes by means of text parameters Parameters lt Mode gt BTDS TDS BTS mode R amp S FSV K76 option MTDS TD SCDMA UE mode R amp S FSV K77 option INSTrument NSELect lt Mode gt This command switches between the measurement modes by means of numbers Parameters lt Mode gt 17 TDS BTS mode R amp S FSV K76 option 18 TD SCDMA UE mode R amp S FSV K77 option SENSe Subsystem This chapter describes the remote control commands of the SENSe subsystem that are specific to the measurement application SENSe CDPower Commande 178 SENSe POWer Commande 183 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 184 SENSe ADJust Gubevstem eene 184 SENSe ESPectrum Gubevsiem eee 186 SENSe BANDwidth subesvstem nene nennen 196 SENSe FREQuency subsystem sse menn 200 SENSe POWer subevstem eene nnn nnne nennen 203 SENSe SWEep subevstem eene enne enne 212 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem ssssssessss een 218 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 177 R amp S FSV K76 K77
50. ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are obtained Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 147 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Example CALCulate Subsystem CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON Switches on the che
51. AVG EE 161 CALCGulate n STATIistics NSAMMpIas uii iere haee nere ka agde de Roa ENEE EN 161 CALCulate lt n gt STATisticsiPRESet ese ne ens sa seen ii stern ssa sese naa 162 GALCulatesm STATIsties TN 162 CALCu late lt n gt STATistices SCALe AUTO ONCE ets nn etna EERE E EEE as 163 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexbRaNGe ese nen senis ii esent sanis sas 163 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexbRltEvel seen nnne nn nnns nns nnn a as 163 GALECulatesn STATisties SCALeYLOWer iiid acest xa pa tk daten s AER eRe NEE 164 GAEGUulate mnsSTATIsties SCAber E CN WEE 164 CAL Culate nz GTATletceGCAlexv Uber 164 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe State This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is Switched off Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples lt NoMeasPoints gt This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statistical measurement functions Suffix n irrelevant Parameters lt NoMeasPoints gt 100 to 1E9 RST 100000 EE Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 161 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CL AP SJ A m a uag CALCulate Subsystem E
52. C swpemng RF Measurements CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea surement independently of the predefined standards for details see also chapter 3 3 10 Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 120 and chapter 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 122 of TX Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of carrier signals to be taken into account in channel and adjacent channel power measurements Values from 1 to 18 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 210 of Adj Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of adjacent channels to be considered in the adjacent channel power measurement Values from 0 to 12 are allowed The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels 0 Only the channel powers are measured 1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured 2 The channel powers the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 are measured 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1
53. E Other Commands Referenced in this Manual lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input fullscale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 227 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands mm
54. EC i HI RE CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlev Uber CALCulate lt n gt THReshold CAL Culatesn U NIT POW ET CONFioure CDbowert BTGlCTAbleCATalog nnne eere tnn teens enne 166 CONFioure CDbowert BTGlCTAbBle COMMent ener nennen rtr nennt nennen nenne 166 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY ccsscccssccssccssecesscessecssacerseeesacessacessaceasecseneersanecseaeeneersaeeaseass 166 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABIe DATA csssccscssessssssscssescensncssnscssanecesnsecsacsestccsnasensancenecessneessnacventese 167 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete 168 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle MSH ft eese eese eese neenon nnn nn natae hn daa a aseo conan nen 168 CONFioure CDbowert BTGICTABIeNAME nnns net nnr sen rntr sen ene nnn nnns nnn 168 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle ORDel csccccsccescssesecessscesnccseacersacessecesanessaeccscesensersanecsceceneessaneasaaes 168 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTOore esses enn eee nneen rennen neret senes 169 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect eee erre ertn rne ertet nennen nuoto oria Eon osos aea hae ian 169 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe 165 CONFioure CDbowert BTGIMEAGurement nennen nnne enn nrnt sinn these tits tain nnns ennt 169 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames sss een eren nenne trennen 170 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOint 1 oreet ennt aaa aaaea aa 170 DiAGnostic nz GERVicehGOurce
55. ESPect rum RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe on page 192 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP HSP ON SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard This command selects the specified XML file under C r_s instr sem_std Ifthe file is stored in a subdirectory include the relative path Example ESP PRES WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass 31 39 xml Selects the PowerClass 31 39 xml XML file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory ESP PRES W CDMA 3GPP DL 31 39 dBm The query returns information about the selected standard the link direction and the power class If no standard has been selected the query returns None SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore This command copies the XML files from the C NR SNVinstrNsem backup folder to the C NR SNinstrNsem std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Example ESP PRES REST Restores the originally provided XML files Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 188 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGENEGEEMPCUNMMCLQ RR H Q U s nnrt SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings as presettings in the specified XML file under C r_s instr sem backup Parameters lt FileName gt Example ESP PRES STOR WCDMAN3GPPNDLNPowerClass 31 39 xml Stores the settin
56. Functions a G UM we Code Domain Analysis Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 234 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband UO the source can also be configured here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 231 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 226 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 228 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Le
57. Manual 1173 0743 02 06 169 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CONFigure Subsystem Parameters measurement ACLR Adjacent Channel Power CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CDPower Code Domain Power ESPectrum Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth Occupied Bandwidth POWer Channel Power PVTime Power vs Time RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Mode TDS CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames numeric value This command defines the number of subframes to be used for averaging Parameters numeric value Subframe value RST 100 Example CONF CDP PVT SFR 50 Sets the number of subframes to 50 Mode TDS CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOint numeric value This command sets the switching point between uplink and downlink slots Parameters numeric value 1 to 7 RST 3 Example CONF CDP PVT SPO 7 Sets the switching point to 7 Mode TDS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 170 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands DISPlay Subsystem 4 4 DISPlay Subsystem This chapter describes the remote control commands of the DISPlay subsystem that are specific to the measurement application DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command controls the size of the specified measurement window The result display of the screen is by default the same as that of the first measurement screen Suffix
58. POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel essent IGENGe POWer ACHannel Eil TerAl Pia CHANnel channelz eene IEN Ge POMWer ACHannel Pl TertGSTATelACHannel sessi SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate channel SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt SENSe POWer ACHantiel MODE siinne ae ANEA EESAN EANA coetu habs IGENGe POWer ACHannelNAME ACHannel nennen SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate channel sse eene nnne enne IGENGe POWer ACHannelNAME CHAhNnel channelz nennen nnne nnne EE Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 243 R amp S FSV K76 K77 List of Commands SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet retener rrr tin bein ena a Ea aia ainera 207 IEN Ge POMWer ACHannel PDRE Ger EVel enne nre nne neret rennes 208 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE enne rennen nrnre tren ennneis 208 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO sese 208 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUal esee enn 209 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing AL Termate channelz sse enne 210 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel essent nre 210 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannelg eese nne 209 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNtLt essent ren reete rennen rennes nnne 210 SENSe POWer BANDw
59. S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m e Y X 77 Y AAA T RF Measurements Adapt to Signal Occupied Bandwidth Opens a submenu to configure the measurEment with the following softkeys Auto Level amp Time Adapt to Signal Occupied Bandwidth The Auto Level and Time softkey automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSV Current measurements are aborted when pressing the softkey and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 183 Start Slot Adapt to Signal Occupied Bandwidth Sets the first slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT on page 183 Stop Slot Adapt to Signal Occupied Bandwidth Sets the last slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 183 Adjust Settings Occupied Bandwidth Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector
60. SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel usus 203 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlDth ACHannel eene 204 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlD Al Termate channelz 204 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel esses enne 205 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channels sees 205 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil TerAl Pa CHAnel channelz renerne 205 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel cesses 205 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate channel esses 206 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel channels eese 206 SENS amp e 3POWer ACHannebMODE 2 eco tton tete imu ko rok nde e dea fades et EAR 206 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannelNAME ACHannel esses eee nennen nnne 207 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate channel sees 207 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channel eese nen 207 ISENSeJPOWer AGHannel E 207 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel DREGerRL EVel nnne ennt 208 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE nennen 208 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO esses 208 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUal eese 209 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel sese 209 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channels esses 210 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannel
61. Stop The measurement has been stopped or in single sweep mode the end of the sweep has been reached Remote command ABORt on page 234 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum on page 236 Restore Standard Files Spectrum Emission Mask Copies the XML files from the C R_S instr sem_backup folder to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore on page 188 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 74 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m Q V E OU T ni 1QYAC H RF Measurements Adapt to Signal Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to configure the measurEment with the following softkeys Auto Level amp Time Adapt to Signal Spectrum Emission Mask The Auto Level and Time softkey automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSV Current measurements are aborted when pressing the softkey and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 183 Start Slot Adapt to Signal Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the first slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT on page 183 Stop Slot Adapt to Signal Spectrum E
62. The following chapters describe all functions available with the firmware application in detail beginning with some background information on the various measurements Channel Characteristics Depending on the symbol rate of a code channel it has a different spreading factor and a different number of symbols per slot The following table shows the relationships Spread Sym QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 64QAM ing Fac bols tor Slot Bits per ksps Bits per ksps Bits per ksps Bits per ksps Slot slot slot slot 1 704 1408 281 6 2112 422 4 2816 563 2 4224 844 8 2 352 704 140 8 1056 211 2 1408 281 6 2112 422 4 4 176 352 70 4 528 105 6 704 140 8 1056 211 2 8 88 176 35 2 264 52 8 352 70 4 528 105 6 16 44 88 17 6 132 26 4 176 35 2 264 52 8 The data rates in the table result from the bits per slot referred to a subframe length of 5 ms You can select the code channel and the slot to be analyzed with the Select Channel and the Select Slot softkeys For example select code channel 1 16 code number 1 for spreading factor 16 and slot 2 Activate the Code Domain Power result display in one screen and EVM vs Symbol in a second screen Screen A shows the Code Domain Power of slot number 2 and selects code channel 1 16 which turns red Screen B shows the results of the EVM vs Symbol measurement of code channel 1 16 in slot 2 with 44 cor responding values derived from the table above 39 1 C
63. UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 226 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands mmE M X C snm
64. UpperLimit gt alternate adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 146 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value O to 100dB limit for the lower and the upper alternate lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 0 DB Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower
65. and remain changed even after deactivating Fast SEM mode Example Sweep List Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range Start 12 75 MHz 8 MHz 4MHz 3 515 MHz Range Stop 8 MHz 4 MHz 3 515 MHz 2 715 MHz Filter Type Channel Gaussian Rew ime 30 kHz vew 10m 10 MHz Ref Level 10 dBm 10 dBm RF Att Mode Auto Auto RF Attenuator 10 dB 10 dB Transd Factor None None None None Limit Check 1 Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Abs Limit Start 1 23 5dBm 19 5dBm 32 5dBm 32 5dBm 20 5 dBm Abs Limit Stop 1 23 5 dBm 19 5 dBm 32 5dBm 20 5 dBm 20 5 dBm Rel Limit Start 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Rel Limit Stop 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Limit Check 2 Relative Relative Relative Relative Relative P fa ma en Fig 3 3 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In figure 3 3 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly 5 separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally 3 3 10 Predefined CP ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement the test parameters for the channel and adjacent channel measurements are configured automatically The availa ble standards are listed below Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 120 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES command
66. ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 230 INPut EATT on page 229 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 41 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 1 1 4 Code Domain Analysis This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 226 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Auto Set menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Applications for CDA measure
67. channel power density is displayed instead Thus the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm Hz The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log 9 channel bandwidth By means of this function it is possible e g to measure the signal noise power density or use the additional functions ACLR Abs Rel on page 64 and ACLR Reference on page 60 to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 133 Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to select the power mode Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 63 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions MGR A P Tme RF Measurements Clear Write Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu lated directly from the current trace default mode Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE WRIT see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 132 Max Hold Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm The hig
68. chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Remote command ESP RANG3 INS BEF see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert on page 192 Insert after Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range The range numbers of all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Remote command ESP RANGI INS AFT see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert on page 192 Delete Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Deletes the currently focused range if possible The range numbers are updated accord ingly For further details refer to chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range DELete on page 190 Symmetric Setup Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask If activated the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 70 R amp S FSV K76
69. command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 230 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands o w S A URN Other Commands Referenced in this Manual 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 INPut SELect Source This command selects the
70. default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11a b g j n e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications in
71. each code The measurement evaluates the total signal of a specific channel over a single slot Con figure this result display via the Result Settings dialog box Code Domain Power 1 Clrw Start Code 1 1 Code Stop Code 16 The power values of the active and inactive channels are displayed in different colors e Yellow active channel e Cyan inactive channel e Red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel turn red When working with predefined channel tables every code is regarded as active It is possible to select more detailed result displays for inactive codes but the results for these are not valid Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Composite EVM Display Configuration Starts the Composite EVM Error Vector Magnitude result display Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 29 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Code Domain Analysis This result display is for measuring the modulation accuracy It determines the error vec tor magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in 96 The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each cap
72. error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSV and that of the device under test Frequency differences between the transmitter and receiver of more than 1 0 kHz impair synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized e 1Q Imbalance Offset Shows the IQ imbalance and the DC offset of the signal in e Rho Shows the quality parameter Rho According to the TD SCDMA standard Rho is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated ref erence signal When Rho is measured the TD SCDMA standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied e Composite EVM Shows the Composite EVM of the signal The Composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and an ideal reference signal e Pk CDE SF16 Shows the Peak Code Domain Error on page 30 of the signal for a spreading factor of 16 Channel Result Channel Result Summary Display Configuration The Channel Results show results measured over a specific channel in a specific slot e Channel SF Shows the number of the channel and its spreading factor e Channel Pwr Abs Rel Shows the absolute and the relative powers of the channel The relative channel power is in relation to the total power of the data parts of the signal e Symbol EVM Shows the channel s peak and average Error Vector Magnitude e Data Rate Shows the data rate of the channel e Modula
73. frequency nionem tnter nori 19 39 86 reference level sseseeeeene 19 40 92 Offset BIET aaaeei a a 21 46 Online help Working WIN EE 10 Options FSV B25 cioncsaiieneeieit reb 40 90 229 RF Preamplifier B22 19 40 90 Overwrite mode ccccccecececeeeeee eeeeteeeteceeeeteneeeeenaees 44 105 P Ph Noise Auto Peak Search remote eu EE 137 polarity external ee e TEE 21 external trigger gate seen 46 trigger edge m Positive Peak detector sssssssses 104 power bandwidth percentage sss 75 Power Classes SEM 73 power measurement irem ine 64 Preamplifier B22 sss 19 40 90 PrE Agger p EAEE EE 21 47 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 49 226 R amp S Support EE 50 reference value channel power sene 65 reference level ear ero CEP 38 offset m 19 40 92 Reference level 19 39 88 Reference Level BIG ital NG WE Resolution bandwidth Result Settings SOMMCY EE RF Preamplifier B22 RMS RMS detector RX Settings Cc MP 49 S Sample detector es z sample militer eR Sample rate Digital 1 Q Interface remote control n2 elle Ce ME scaling level axis n x and y axis s
74. gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute command This mechanism allows automatic check ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt O to 100dB the value for the lower limit must be lower than the lt UpperLimit gt value for the upper limit RST 0 dB Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 144 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command produces a query error Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Return values Result The result is returned in the form lt result gt result where result PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second denotes the upper adjacent channel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP A
75. indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage 1 4 TYPE VIDeo LINear i Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well 0 Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definition
76. integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is extended to define additional settings e Tx Bandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC filter is activated Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 71 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RF Measurements For further details refer to chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 196 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 186 ENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 187 ENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 187 Edit Reference Range Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Reference Range x Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Peak Power Channel Power Settings Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Measures the channel power within the referen
77. is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 230 EI Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies i
78. is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace Usage Event Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 154 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e in descending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next higher minim
79. minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 156 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands a ee ES eS nga CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the mar
80. of the Span Menu for RF Measurements eeeeeeeeeeeceeecaeeeaaeeeaeeaaeees 86 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements nrn 87 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Men 92 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 99 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements 102 Further Information eterne Lernen inneren in cerra una REESEN rana in 103 Detector Overview eene ennemi nennen nnnm nnn nenne 104 Trace Mode Cvernview nennen nennen nene nennen rennen e nennen nen 105 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type 107 List of Available RRC and Channel Eilters en 107 Ranges and Range Gettngs eene 109 ASCII File Export Format orani ere tero to dn cr iR eder agar 110 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Fies 111 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 116 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Meaeurements 119 Predefined CP ACLR Standards eene 120 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameter 122 Code Domain Analysis The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result displays for measurements in the code domain Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 14 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EES Code Domain Analysis Result Display Description Code Domain Power Result display for the Code Domain Power Composite EVM Error Vector Magnitude on slot level Peak Code Domain Error Maximum error between test signal and reference
81. possible numeric value of the center frequency as result arbitrary block program data This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate Subsystem The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem Note that most commands in the CALCulate subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here CALCulate FEED Commande 128 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Commande 129 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 135 CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem eene 135 CALCulate LIMit aubsvstem nennen nennen nnns 142 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum SUDSYStOM enn 149 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 127 CALCulate Subsystem 4 2 3 4 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem nennen 153 4 2 8 5 CALCulate PSE subsvstem eene rne nnne nens 159 4 2 3 6 CALCulate STATistics subeystem nennen 161 4 2 8 7 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 165 4 2 1 CALCulate FEED Commands CALCulate lt n gt FEED result display This command selects the result display for the code domain analyzer Suffix n 1 4 window R amp S FSV K76 K77 4 2 2 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 Parameters result display Example Mode Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem
82. signal of the selected slot Code Domain Error Power Error between test signal and reference signal Power vs Symbol Channel power on symbol level Channel Power vs Slot Average power of a specific channel over all slots Result Summary Summary of results in tabular form Channel Table Summary of channel configuration in tabular form Channel Constellation Channel constellation diagram EVM vs Symbol Error Vector Magnitude on symbol level Channel Bitstream Summary of bits in a specific channel Composite Constellation Constellation diagram on chip level You can display up to four result displays at the same time Any result can be displayed in either screen For further details on the display configuration refer to the Display Con figurationsoftkey Just above the measurement screen s the most common settings and parameters are summarized Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 15 0 GHz Channel 1 16 Code Power Relative Att 10 dB Slot Oof Data Rate 17 6 ksps The default settings of the Code Domain Analyzer are summarized in the Settings Over view dialog box There you can also reset the instrument to its default values by pressing the Set to Default button 3 1 1 Menu and Softkey Description The following chapters describe the menus and softkeys specific to the R amp S FSV 76 and 77 options for CDA measurements The Bandwidth Span and Marker menus are not available for CDA measurements All menus not described here a
83. tables every code is regarded as active Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Channel Constellation Display Configuration Starts the Channel Constellation result display This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot Symbol Constellation 1 Clrw The R amp S FSV K76 supports QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 64QAM modulation types Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 EVM vs Symbol Display Configuration Starts the Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display This result display shows the EVM on symbol level The x axis represents the symbols and the y axis shows the EVM in The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot EVM vs Symbol 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 14 67 Sym Stop Sym 175 The number of symbols is in the range from 44 to 704 and depends on the spreading factor Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 36 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions MGE ML ue ats Code Domain Analysis Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these channels do not contain data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Channel Bitstream Display Configurati
84. the reference level If the measured channel power equals the reference level the signal path is not overloaded Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for the relative measurement Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO Channel This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The transmission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the low est power or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 134 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 208 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCUNMGMCUQA pn nnum SENSe Subsystem Parameters Channel MINim
85. the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window m irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 137 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt 1 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the
86. the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 164 y Unit Abs Scaling CCDF Defines the scaling type of the y axis The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 164 Default Settings Scaling CCDF Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values x axis ref level 10 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 162 Adjust Settings Scaling CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 163 Gated Trigger On Off CCDF Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF channel The trigger source is changed to EXTERN if this function is switched on The gate ranges are defined using the Gate Ranges on page 80 softkey Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 213 SENSe SWEep EGATe S
87. to logarithmic mode The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level val ues if you halve the linear power the logarithmic level decreases by 3 dB LOGarithmic The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier RST LINear Example BAND VID TYPE LIN Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier SENSe FREQuency subsystem E LE Gene 200 SENSE JFREQUShey CENMGn STEP ET 200 SENS amp JFREDusncy CENTO STEP AUTO cirin rec Ere uL eua dece k ceu neo ta Re Red ENN aa 201 SENSeJFREQuency CENTSESTEP3LEINK eine re ne a ai iiaa 201 ISENGeJEbRtOuencv CENTer STEPR UNK FACTor enne 201 SENS amp JTIFREDUsricy DFESel 2 recti eno REESEN ENEE ERAN EON DA Den dde 202 ISENSe ene ET 202 SENSeg FREQUuency SPAN F HELENE SEN te etr net RR KENNEN 202 SENS FRE QUON S EE 202 SENSE FREQU SNOV STOP ncc EN e Feuer E a ates AEN E 202 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring frequency time domain Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 200 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCUNMGMCUQ AL
88. turns red Channel Power vs Slot ei Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 6 The power values of the active and inactive channels are displayed in different colors e Yellow active channel e Cyan inactive channel e Green channel with alias power Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 32 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions MER MMC A m u P Code Domain Analysis e Red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel turn red Alias power results from channels with a different code class When working with predefined channel tables every code is regarded as active Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Result Summary Display Configuration The Result Summary shows the data of various measurements in numerical form Result Summary Set 1 1 Clrw Chip Rate Error 0 13 ppm Trigger To Frame Slot Result Slot 0 im Carrier Frequ Error Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Result Summary Set Result Summary Display Configuration The Result Summary shows results measured over the total signal or a selected set e Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 28 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and the
89. 0 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula level mixer levelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 225 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 40 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mMAmI EH AmP We Code Domain Analysis This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 225 El Atten On Off This softk
90. 0743 02 06 242 R amp S FSV K76 K77 List of Commands SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo essen 189 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth RE Goluton 189 IGENZGe EGbechumRAhNGe zrangez COUN nennen nren neret eren resen ense trennen 189 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range DEL ete seen nne nennen nth nt nnn 190 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer fb nennen nere neren tenete 190 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezINPuCATTenuaton enne 191 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO sese 192 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezINPuCGAINGTATe ener nnne 192 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezINGert nnnm nennen n nn ntn inni 192 IGENZGe EGbechumR AhNGe zangez UMitzsourcez AbBGolute GTAht ee eeeeseceeeeeseeeseeeeneeeeeeennnees 193 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source ABSolute STOP sss 193 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source RELative S ARI 193 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source RELative STOP sse 194 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt STATe IEN Ge EGbechumRANGe czangez RL EMVel entren nennen sete testet nnett sen SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep T IME esses nennen IGENGe EGbechum RANGe crangez GWEep TIME AUTO SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSsducer essere neret nennen neret rennes SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARIt
91. 173 0743 02 06 241 R amp S FSV K76 K77 List of Commands TRIGger n 2 SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 232 TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDOff sessi enne nnne neree nre 232 TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis essent nennen nnne nnne 232 TRIGger n SEQuence LEVel BBPOWSer 2 intret rer etre een th ht eren ont ndr rin ri a 231 TRIGger n SEQuence LEVel EXTernal eene nnne 233 RS ele e E RE ee TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce SENSe ADJUSEALL E IGENZGe IADJustCOhNFouratonHvGTeressl Oe 184 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYS Teresis UPPer essent eene nnne 184 IEN Ge IAD lust CONEoure L Eve DUbaton nenne eene enne 185 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE essent 185 SENSe ADJust F REQUenOy etate ort rr nent rt p t ri te ee Then DR ERE LEE ER Ra PER adiada Ee kar raa SENSe JADJust LEVel A EISE En ee E TE SENSe JAVERage n STATe Trace IEN Ge IGANDwictblDWwlDtb Vieo nennen nnne nnne enn nns IEN Ge IDGANDwicdtblDWwlDtb ViDeo AUTO SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATioO essen nennen nennen ennt SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE essen rennen ennt enne SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution esee ener nennen IEN Ge IDGANDwiblDWIDODTRE Solution AUTO SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT sese eere SENSe BANDwi
92. 3 02 06 174 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PEG ML Q H tQU MH pt DISPlay Subsystem Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units for example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display Mode CDMA BT EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Value This command defines a reference level offset Suffix n irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Value Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix n Selects the measurem
93. 4 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information Relative Absolute and Rela tive Absolute or Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Yes Table 3 5 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Index 0 19 Inde XE s are continuous and have to start with O Yes Name lt string gt Name of the range Only if Referen ceChannel con tains a name and the range is the reference range ChannelType Short Name lt string gt TX Adjacent Short name of the range No Yes WeightingFilter Only if Referen cePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the refer ence range Type RRC CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes Roll Off Factor 0 1 Excess bandwidth of the fil ter Only if the filter type is RRC dBr dB Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start frequency in Hz Start value of the range Yes Stop frequency in Hz Stop value of the range Yes Limit dBm Hz dBm dBc A Range must contain Yes dBr dB exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the othe
94. 4 bits 64QAM 1056 bits Spreading Factor 2 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 222 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands TRACe Subsystem QPSK 704 bits 8PSK 1056 bits 16QAM 1408 bits 64QAM 2112 bits Spreading Factor 1 QPSK 1408 bits 8PSK 2112 bits 16QAM 2816 bits 64QAM 4224 bits Suffix n Query parameters LIST TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Return values lt active gt lt code class gt lt cdpabsolute gt lt cdprelative gt lt cerror gt lt channel gt lt channel type gt lt code number gt lt evmpeak gt lt evmrms gt lt ferror gt Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 1 4 irrelevant Queries the results of the Spectrum Emission Mask Refer to the TRAC DATA command of the base unit for a more detailed description Selects the trace to be queried Shows the number of active channels Shows the number of active channels Code class of the channel The code class specifies the spreading factor of the channel The range is 0 4 0 spreading factor 1 1 spreading factor 2 2 spreading factor 4 3 spreading factor 8 4 spreading factor 16 For the data rates refer to the channel characteristics Absolute channel power in dBm The range is Relative channel power in dB The range is 0o Chip Rate Error in ppm Channel number The range is 1 16 The number of channels depends on the spreading factor
95. 5 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Value RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 225 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEENGPCUNMMCLQ T J es Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital
96. 73 0743 02 06 139 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The correspond ing delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement w
97. 73 0743 02 06 39 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions a Mw Code Domain Analysis Y Axis Minimum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the minimum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected Screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MINimum on page 174 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 175 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 230 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 1
98. A EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital UO Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 48 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 228 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGENEGEENMCUNMMCLQR SQ RM Other Commands Referenced in this Manual This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO State If enabled the sample rate of the digital baseband IQ input signal is set automatically by the connected device if the currently used sample rate is provided indicated by the lt SampleRateType gt parameter in the result of the INPut DIQ CDEVice command This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Mode IQ VS
99. A EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 229 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands mm sg Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut EATT AUTO State This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenu ation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This
100. ACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 78 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m C M ORK amp Q O Y Y O IUK T J YI RF Measurements Range Log 1 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log Manual x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis manually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Linear x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling for the level axis in 96 The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in 9o referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the defaul
101. AX DL ETSIN MHz 1 75 MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E DL System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F DL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G DL WIMAX DL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz DL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz DL WIMAX UL ETSI MHz 1 75 MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E UL System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F UL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G UL WIMAX UL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz UL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz UL WLAN 802_11_TURBO ETSI xml IEEE 802 11 IEEE xml IEEE 802 11 WLANY802 11a ETSI xml IEEE 802 11a IEEE xml IEEE 802 11a WLANY802 11b IEEE xml IEEE 802 11b WLANY802 11j 10MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 11j WLANY802 11j 20MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 1 1j EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz_CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A gt 1GHz DL a Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 117 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz_CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW_03_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 03 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE
102. BW Pulse 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No addi tional evaluation is performed by the video filter This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 199 RBW VBW Noise 10 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 199 RBW VBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 199 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 97 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Fun
103. CH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dB CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe State This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before this command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 145 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB be
104. CONFigure C DPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command queries the names of all the channel tables stored on the flash disk for the current operating mode The syntax for the return values is lt sum of file lengths of all files gt lt free disk space gt 1st file name gt 1st file length 2nd file name gt 2nd file length gt lt nth file name gt lt nth file length gt Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Returns all existing channel tables Usage Query only Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent lt Comment gt This command defines a comment for the channel table selected with CONFig ure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME Parameters lt Comment gt comment for the channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for CTAB 1 Writes a comment for CTAB 1 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt TargetFileName gt This command copies one channel table to another Select the channel table you want to copy using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME command The name of the channel table may contain up to eight characters Parameters lt TargetFileName gt lt string gt name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Makes a copy of CTAB 1 with the name CTAB 2 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA
105. Count on page 44 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 235 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 235 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 43 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 1 1 6 Code Domain Analysis Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 235 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold op
106. DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 15 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 20 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 01 4 MHz_CFhigher1GHz xm BW 01 4 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_03_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_03_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 05 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_05_0_MHz_CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 15 0 MHz CF
107. EP LINK FACT 20PCT Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 201 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MER M CAUOC w T E s g wmgunr SENSe Subsystem SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines the frequency offset Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ SENSe FREQuency SPAN Span This command defines the frequency span Parameters Span min span to fmax RST fmax fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ SPAN 10MHz SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command sets the frequency span to its maximum Example FREQ SPAN FULL SENSe FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 fmax IS Specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STAR 20MHz SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 202 SENSe Subsystem 4 6 3 5 SENSe POWer subsystem SENSeTPOWer ACHannglAGOPalls tdt ENEE ENEE 203
108. GbACngCHAhNnel channelz nn 210 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt eese enne nnns 210 SENSeJdPOWsr BANDWIGdIhIBVWIDID 12 NENNEN 211 SENS amp POWerTHSPeeg tren eee eee t Eege 211 Ei Eiere e leen DE 211 E Le eng e 212 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command sets the number of adjacent channels upper and lower channel in pairs The figure O stands for pure channel power measurement Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt 0 to 12 RST 1 Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent chan nel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched on SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio com munication system The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this mod ification R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 107 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID CHAN2 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel Bandwidth This c
109. ISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log Manual Range Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis manually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in 96 The grid is divided into decadal sections Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 89 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m e AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA RF Measurements Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta marke
110. K77 Remote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate channel State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ALT3 ON Activates the weighting filter for alternate channel 3 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe C HANnel lt channel gt State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified TX channel Suffix lt channel gt 1 18 the TX channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT CHA3 ON Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE lt Mode gt This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measurement The command is only available with span gt 0 and if the number of adjacent channels is greater than 0 For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured chan nel power using the command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE Parameters Mode ABSolute RELative ABSolute absolute adjacent channel measurement RELative relative adjacent channel measurement RST RELative Example POW ACH MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 206 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control C
111. L Y UPP 0 01 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 164 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 2 3 7 4 3 CONFigure Subsystem Other Referenced CALCulate Commands E TE EN E EEN 165 GALGCulatespn cUNIT PONWMGI E 165 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search A threshold line is automatically turned on Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Threshold The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer RST STATe to OFF Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm CONFigure Subsystem The following commands configure code domain measurements CONFigure C DPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command activates or deactivates the RECENT channel table To select another channel table use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 165 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Activates the RECENT channel table Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA
112. LR Off the bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically Since all adjacent channels often have the same bandwidth the other alternate channels are set to the bandwidth ofthe adjacent channel when it is changed Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths For details on available channel filters see chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 203 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel on page 204 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate channel on page 204 ACLR Reference Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Select the transmission channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced TX Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a refer ence channel Lowest amp Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission chan nel that for the upper adjacent channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual on page 209 SENSe POWer ACHan
113. Mask Measurements cccccccecccccecseeseceeeeseeseceseseeeeeess 119 3 3 10 Predefined CP ACLR Gtandarde A 120 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameter 122 3 3 1 Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSV The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSV are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available Table 3 1 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measurement point RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point All detectors work in parallel in the background which means
114. ND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio lt Ratio gt This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters lt Ratio gt Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 01 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE FilterType This command selects the type of resolution filter For detailed information on filters see chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 and chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 107 When changing the filter type the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type 5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type FFT Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 198 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands A dm n Y ua SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The available video
115. NT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit subsystem CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute esee 143 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe eese 143 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel REI ativel erener e nereroerorsrsrsrnrnnne nnn 144 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbowerACHannelREGu 144 CALOulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel REI ativelSTATe eese 145 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel ABSolute eese 146 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate channelzfREL ativel eneee 147 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe 147 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATE nennen aiaa 148 GALCulate n LTIMIteK EAIE E 148 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 142 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MMC ML RH n eT I CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel dur ing adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that th
116. OURce on page 214 Gate Ranges CCDF Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace For details on configuration see Defining gated triggering for APD and CCDF meas urements in the base unit description Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 80 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions me O Ps RF Measurements Gate Ranges xi Trace 1 Comment Range 1 Start Range 1 Stop 3 ms 1 ps 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us Range 1 Use off off off off off Range 2 Start 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us Range 2 Stop 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us Range 2 Use off off off off off off Range 3 Start 1 us ius 1 us i us 1 us ius Range 3 Stop 1 us dus 1 ps ius 1 us 1us Range 3 Use Off Off Off Off Off Off Remote command SWE EGAT ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 213 Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TRACI COMM SlotA see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent on page 214 Adds a comment to trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe lt range gt on page 215 Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt on page 215 Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms SWE EGAT TRACI STopl 5ms see
117. P ACLR Gtandarde eene nnns 120 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters sss 122 Remote Control Commands eene 124 Notations E EES Ee 125 CALCulate Subsystem ene uec tei esee tieni pe EENS EEN 127 CALGulate FEED Cormmancds iicet etant tae dd eege eege eege 128 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Commandes seen 129 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 135 CALCulate DELTamarker subevstem eene 135 CAL Culate LIMIT SUDSYStO IM si enero tote xpi Ent tnax prat en negax yeux eun eaux Exstat dor Yu aede c Ex 142 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsvsiem essen 149 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem nene 153 CALCulate PSE subsystem oret trends cette tune AEREE 159 CALCulate STATistics subsvstem A 161 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 165 CONFigure Subsystem eese eene NANNAN EANAN nnn nnn nn enitn NANAS 165 RE dE E EN 171 INSTrument subsystem eese eene nennen nnne nnnnrn innen nnn nir nin nnn 177 SENSe Subsystem 2 eege deed 177 SENSe CDPower Commandis eese eiiim einnehmen nnn 178 SENSe POWer Comimards ie edente dade deeg ege Ed 183 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 4 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Contents 4 6 3 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 184 4 6 3 1 SENSe ADJust Gubevstem enne nennen nennen nennen 184 4 6 3 2 SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem sss eene 186 4 6 8 3 SENSe BANDwid
118. PMIDamble Returns the power of the midamble in dBm RHO Returns the parameter Rho SFACtor Returns the spreading factor of the channel SLOT Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 131 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands M H sp J rnmngem q mug CALCulate Subsystem Returns the currently analyzed slot number SRATe Returns the symbol rate in ksps Note that TFRame returns a 9 if the trigger is at Free Run TFRame Returns the Trigger to Frame time in seconds Example CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CERR Returns the Chip Rate Error Usage Query only Mode TDS CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE Mode This commands defines the method by which the channel power values are calculated from the current trace in the window specified by the suffix n Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters Mode WRITe MAXHold WRITe The channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu lated directly from the current trace MAXHold The power values are calculated from the current trace and com pared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm Example CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH Sets the Maxhold channel power mode CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of the performe
119. R amp S FSV K76 K77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS an Measurement Application Operating Manual Start Code 1 SCH Table Channel Type Ref Le Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 6 DRM m Done m 4 1173 0743 02 06 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S GFSV options e R amp S FSV K76 1310 8603 02 e R amp S FSV K77 1310 8655 02 This manual is applicable for the following analyzer models with firmware version 2 0 and higher e R amp SGFSV 3 1307 9002K03 e R amp SGFSV 7 1307 9002K07 e R amp SGFSV 13 1307 9002K13 e R amp SGFSV 30 1307 9002K30 e R amp SGFSV 40 1307 9002K39 e R amp SGFSV 40 1307 9002K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The fol
120. Remote Control Commands nese ee Q 8 SENSe Subsystem 4 6 1 SENSe CDPower Commands The SENSe CDPower subsystem configures the code domain measurements SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNo gt This command selects the code number Parameters lt CodeNo gt lt numeric value gt Range 1 to 16 depends on the base spreading factor Increment 1 RST 1 Example CDP CODE 8 Selects the eighth channel Mode TDS SENSe CDPower ICThreshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example CDP ICT 50 Sets the Inactice Channel Threshold to 50 dB Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command specifies the number of frames slots that are captured by one sweep In CDMA mode this command sets the capture length in multiples of the power control group Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 63 RST 7 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Mode TDS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 178 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MMC S
121. SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP range on page 216 Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k PERiod on page 214 Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Adapt to Signal CCDF Opens a submenu to configure the measurEment with the following softkeys Auto Level amp Time Adapt to Signal CCDF The Auto Level and Time softkey automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSV Current measurements are aborted when pressing the softkey and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 183 Start Slot Adapt to Signal CCDF Sets the first slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT on page 183 nac pu c Bm Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 81 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions SSES RF Measurements Stop Slot Adapt to Signal CCDF Sets the last slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 183 Adjust Sett
122. SPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE This command automatically scales the y axis in order to get the best display result for the active trace Suffix n 1 4 window Parameters lt ONCE gt RST OFF Example DISP WIND2 TRAC AUTO Adjusts the y axis of measurement window 2 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum numeric value This command defines the upper limit of the y axis in the indicated measurement window Suffix n 1 4 window Parameters lt numeric value gt The unit and range depend on the result display RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DBM DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 DBM Defines a y axis with a minimum value of 60 dBm and a maximum value of 0 dBm Mode CDMA EVDO TDS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 173 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands yy M P
123. SV includes in the measurement The results of the Power vs Time measurement are based on the average of the number of the subframes Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames on page 170 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 82 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions PRG LO R A w ieri 3 2 7 2 RF Measurements List Evaluation Power vs Time Toggles the list evaluation on and off The table shows the following data e Start and Stop Defines the start time and the stop time of one of the sections of the limit line in us Each row in the table represents one section of the limit line e Avg Shows the average power of the signal in the corresponding section of the limit line in relative and absolute values e Max Shows the maximum power of the signal in the coresponding section of the limit line in relative and absolute values e Time MaxPower Shows the exact moment in time at which the maximum power level occurs Auto Level amp Time Power vs Time Starts the autorange routine for the reference level This also creates the relationship between trigger and subframe start Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 183 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu It is pos sible that your instrument configuration does not provide all s
124. Se JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt DELete This command deletes the specified range The range numbers are updated accordingly The reference range cannot be deleted A minimum of three ranges is mandatory Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Example ESP RANG4 DEL Deletes range 4 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Type NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters PULSe EMI 6dB filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet Example ESP RANG1 FILT TYPE RRC Sets the RRC filter type for range 1 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for the specified range Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 190 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MGE A Y a m QM SENSe Subsystem In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measure ment includes only
125. Sult on page 130 Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the Sweep List dialog box Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask After a preset the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters For each range you can change the parameters listed below To insert or delete ranges use the Insert Before Range Insert After Range Delete Range softkeys The measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box Edit Sweep List Close Sweep List softkey see Close Sweep List on page 70 The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be available permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to chapter 3 3 7 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 111 If you load one of the provided XML files Load Standard softkey see Load Stand ard on page 74 the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the selected standard For further details refer also to chapter 3 3 8 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 116 Note If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Range Start Range Stop Sweep List di
126. Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 217 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 217 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selec
127. TYPe Type This command sets the power reference type Parameters Type PEAK CPOWer PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method RST CPOWer Example ESP RTYP PEAK Sets the peak power reference type SENSe BANDwidth subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution ccn 197 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO eecccctnttn tette 197 IGENSeBANDwOIBWIDONERESoluontEET ttt 197 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 196 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO ecccncntnt tnnt 198 ISENSeBANDwWOIBWIDONERESoluontTEE ttt 198 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VlIDeo ence te ntt tette 199 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO eecccetn ntt tenentes 199 ISENSeBANDuwhlBWIDEh VlDeo R i 199 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE eccentric 200 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND 1 MHz
128. TamarkercmzMAximumNENT sentes nsns nnns 138 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese nennen 139 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt seen sess snnt nns 139 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 139 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzMiNimumNENT nnne nn nennen nnns 140 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeeeeseseeeeene nennen 140 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 140 CAL Culate nzDETamarkercmzlSTATel nennen nnne nennt 140 CALCulate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe estin sese nisse sese a aas 141 Ee EIER EN ENEE EE 141 GALGulate n DEETamarkerem XRELaltive ciii ence das ci aao Re dde ny nnd n Ru apenas 141 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN stes e snetssa isst iiis sss rr s dann 142 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X Reference This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 135 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCUNMMCUQR am U sme
129. The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe AVERage n COUNt Or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It should be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t trace Parameters Mode WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANK RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 3 3 2 Trace Mode Overview on page 105 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other meas urements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t trace Parameters State ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 172 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands DI
130. Type on page 68 RBW see RBW on page 68 VBW see VBW on page 68 Sweep Time Mode see Sweep Time Mode on page 68 Ref Level see Ref Level on page 68 Rf Att Mode see RF Att Mode on page 68 RF Attenuator see RF Att Mode on page 68 Preamp see Preamp on page 69 Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see Fast SEM on page 67 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list In the provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Fast SEM mode is activated by default SCPI command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Consequences When the Fast SEM mode is activated the ranges for which these criteria apply are displayed as one single range The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 119 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information sweep times initially but can be changed When the Fast SEM mode is deactivated the originally defined individual sweep times are reset If Symmetrical Setup mode is active when Fast SEM mode is activated not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically see also Symmetric Setup on page 70 Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each included range
131. UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 184 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters Duration numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 SENSe JADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSV determines the length of the measurement that is performed while determining the ideal reference level Parameters Mode AUTO Automatically determines the measurement length MANual Manual definition of the measurement length RST AUTO Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR MODE MAN Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Specifies the duration manually SENSe ADJus
132. a ecce iaaiiai ta sebh a ead es Lea bebe pia dp eat ae add do 141 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz SREL ative eene nennen ener nent enhn nnn nnns neni 141 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarkercmzs vi 142 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mztGTATel nenne nnne entren enne e nnns ennt sinn rnt r nnn e Berl d pdmzb C CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute er CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe sse CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerACHannelbRtGuhb enne CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative esee CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerACHannelfREL ativelzfAaTe CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel ABSolute sse CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe m CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate channel RELative eee CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower GTATel nennen e sen enne CALCulatecnzLlMitck EGbechum LU IMits eene nnn nnne nnns nnn rnn ern nn CAL Culate cnz LlMitck EGbechum MODE nennen nen nnnn nennen tens nennen enn nanena CAL Culate cnz LlMitck EGbechum PDClLases Classz OUNI CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe s CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum essen CAL Culate cnz LlMitck EGbechum PCLass Cassz MiNmmum eene CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectru
133. abad 20 EE i961 TNMERPET m 20 E 1550 7 NCC 20 L Trigger Source Free Run 21 L Trigger Source External esses tentent nnn nnns 21 L Trigger Polly iiec e nd Eed a au 21 BEL EEN 21 SYNE pora M P 22 L Scrambling Code aeaii ai aaa 22 DEE EE 22 L Sync To forward link KT erageet donas 22 L Sync To downlink Ki 23 L Rotate code channel to associated midamble 23 Gharinel Table le EE 23 L Max Modulation ecce tntntntntnentntrtntntntntntnetotetoteens 23 L Channel Search Mode 24 L Inactive Channel Thresbold ttes 24 Die oi NI MM iam Nuahue beh 24 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 16 Code Domain Analysis e 21 71 E 24 o t o MM 25 L Delete e TT EEN 26 3 ARAM TM 26 vedea To NNNM 26 L Sort Midamble siete Iter etc ebe 26 E 219 MTM 26 Gi 5 e EROS 26 Do TEE 26 DEE 27 EL e V 27 Bad Kee etleche E 27 L Channel Code Murbitr seas tendi ode natali 27 L Code Power 27 L EC cte tendi Puto esie noe nece Peces E t pa d 27 E RE 28 Display Conflgurallghi 2 oae ose te enean euet ENEE 28 L Code Domain Power rnt ttai tet teta taceo eara eta dba 29 L Composite EE 29 L Peak Code Domain Error ennemis 30 L e De ET E 31 EE 32 L Channel Power vs Slot tentent ne 32 E 33 L Result Summary Set 1 33 Beetebuerger boc devio les uti 33 L Channel Result Channel 31 34 Iva BL MR 34 L Channel Constell
134. activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value Operating Manual 11
135. after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 233 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 214 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 21 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EGRE MCLO R r 22 n rTmeget Code Domain Analysis In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 232
136. agram The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 37 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 1 1 2 Code Domain Analysis Select Ch Slot Opens a dialog box to select a specific channel and or slot The results of that channel slot are then shown in the result display Adjust Ref Lvl Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the descrip tion of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 208 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency m
137. ak power 19 25 dBm CREST factor 13 69 dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the measured peak power in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spac ing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe lt Value gt This command defines the level range for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe command Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 10dB to 200dB RST 100dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel lt Value gt This command defines the reference level for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t
138. alog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range Follow the rules described in chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARt on page 190 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP on page 191 Fast SEM Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates Fast SEM mode for all ranges in the sweep list For details see chapter 3 3 9 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 119 Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Symmet rical Setup mode is automatically also deactivated Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 67 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m
139. alog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 175 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Abs Absolute scaling The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 174 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 226 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys I
140. ameters lt SetNo gt Range 0 to SET COUNT 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Selects the 10th set for further analysis Mode CDMA EVDO TDS SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NoOfSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Set Count on page 20 for more information Parameters lt NoOfSets gt Range 1 to TDS 99 CDMA 490 Increment 1 RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 12 Sets the number of sets to 12 Mode TDS SENSe CDPower SLOT numeric value This command selects the slot Power Control Group PCG to be analyzed Parameters numeric value Range 0 to TDS 62 CDMA capture length 1 WCDMA 14 Increment 1 RST 0 The capture length is defined via the SENSe CDPower IOLength command Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower STSLot State This command selects the phase reference for forward link measurements see Sync To forward link K76 on page 22 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 181 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCEMGMCUQ R Pn PD SENSe Subsystem Parameters State ON OFF ON The instrument synchronizes to the midamble of the selected slot OFF The instrument synchronizes to the P CCPCH in slot 0
141. amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RF Measurements For details on the softkeys of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement refer to the Occu pied Bandwidth softkey in the Measurement menu 3 2 5 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF The CCDF measurement displays the CCDF and the Crest Factor The CCDF shows distribution of the signal amplitudes For the measurement a signal section of settable length is recorded continuously in a zero span The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The Crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and 3 2 6 the mean power Beneath the measurement screen a table containing the number of included samples mean and peak power and the Crest factor is displayed The default settings of the CCDF measurement are listed in the table below Parameter Default Value CCDF On RBW 10 MHz Detector Sample For details on the softkeys of the CCDF measurement refer to the CCDF softkey in the Measurement menu Power vs Time The Power vs Time measurement determines the start of the subframe and compares the averaged power in time domain against a transmit On Off mask according to the specification The scaling of the x axis and therefore also the scaling of the limit line are defined by the Switching Point Below the measurement screen you can view a list of the measured data Parameter Defau
142. and trace averaging see chapter 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parame ters on page 122 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 207 CCDF Starts the measurement of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function and the Crest factor For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 169 Percent Marker CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to enter a probability value and to position marker 1 Thus the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily If marker 1 is deactivated it will be switched on automatically Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 76 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions GEMMAM MCLOCVL R o i Pm 1 RF Measurements As all markers the percent marker can be moved simply by touching it with a finger or mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERCent on page 159 Res BW CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal amplitude correctly In order not to influence the peak am
143. and reads trace data from the R amp S FSV The behaviour of the command is the same as in the base unit for RF measurements For code domain measurements and the Power vs Time measurement find a description of the behaviour of the command below Code Domain Power absolute and relative For the Code Domain Power result display the command returns four values for each channel in the following order code class code numbers level power detection Refer to the description below for more details on the return values The query returns a maximum of 16 channels Channels that consist of more than one code are returned as one channel So for example consider the following configuration three active channels out of a total of 12 DPCH 1 16 CC4 7 0 dB DPCH 2 8 CC3 7 3 dB DPCH 3 4 CC2 8 0 dB In this example the command would return the following string active channels in bold 4 1 27 0 1 4 2 55 1 0 3 2 7 3 1 4 5 56 3 0 4 6 55 8 0 4 7 57 0 0 2 3 8 0 1 4 13 55 8 r 4 l4 56 3 0 4 15 55 9 U 4 l6 57 3 0 Code Domain Error Power For the Code Domain Error Power result display the command returns four values for each channel in the following order code class code number gt level power detection Refer to the description below for more details on the return values The query returns a maximum of 16 codes One value is ret
144. andards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This definition is also used for the R amp S FSV if the standards marked with an asterisk are selected o For the R amp S FSV the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters The Adjust Settings softkey see Adjust Settings on page 64 automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration as described in the follow ing e Frequency span The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea surement margin of approx 10 96 If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adja cent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are avail able per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consid eration when selecting the frequency span For channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency span as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements th
145. ands 4 2 3 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 4 2 3 5 4 2 3 6 4 2 3 7 4 2 3 1 CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC MARK FUNC DON SEIL ACP Switches on adjacent channel power measurement Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual CALCulate DELTamarker subevstem eee eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaas 135 CALCulate LIMit SUBSYSTEM ccc ce cecete eee eeette eee ee tenet eene nennen nennen nnns 142 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum SUDSYStOM 00 eee cece eee eeee eee eeeetaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 149 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem eee eeecte eee eeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeeeaas 153 CALCulate PSE subevstem eee eecceeeee eee eeeetnne eter eset N ANAR ENEN NEEE ENRA RANNER ENNEN 159 CALCulate STATistics subevestem eee eee eteeeeee eee eeettcne eter rete etaaeeeeeeeeeeeniaeeeeeeeeeeeaas 161 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 165 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINEX cccccccesccceeeceseeseeeceeeeeees 135 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHont edRbOnty 136 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe eese 136 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHonbhNOise AUTO 137 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe eese 137 CGALCulatesmsDEETamarkersSmosLINK eade ee adea een bna Dania tao S Se a 138 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumlEEFT senes 138 CAL Culate nz DEL
146. ange AND Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when both limits are violated OR Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated RST REL Example ESP RANG3 LIM STAT AND Sets for all ranges the combined absolute relative limit check Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 194 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MGE MCLOU C R J ZA J t n Uo SENSe Subsystem SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel Value This command sets the reference level for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Value gt Refer to the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example ESP RANG2 RLEV 0 Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command sets the sweep time for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters lt SweepTime gt Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet RST 0 27 s Example ESP RANG1 SWE TIME 1
147. anual 1173 0743 02 06 191 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PRENNE A TV M nn SENSe Subsystem Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 0 dB Example ESP RANG3 INP ATT 10 Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG2 INP ATT AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe State This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP RANG3 INP GAIN STATe ON Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert Mode This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range
148. asso ciated midamble according to section AA 2 of the standard document 3GPP TS 25 221 If the associated midamble is missing the common phase reference is used for this code channel Remote command SENSe CDPower STSLot ROTate on page 182 Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu Max Modulation Channel Table Settings Defines the highest modulation to be considered in the automatic channel search In low SNR environments it may be necessary to limit the channel search to lower modulations than 64QAM The following types are available QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 64QAM Remote command SENSe CDPower MMAX on page 179 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 23 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions maU A G Code Domain Analysis Channel Search Mode Channel Table Settings Defines the kind of channel table used for the measurement Predefined channel tables are a way to customize measurements The RECENT channel table contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Prede fined In addition new channel tables can be created and saved to be used in measure ments Auto Search The Auto Search mode scans the whole code domain including all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers for active channels The automatic search provides an overview of the c
149. asurement with one or several carrier signals the power is always referenced to a transmission channel i e no value is displayed for Tx1 Ref Power Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 208 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 65 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m OO Y J RF Measurements Noise Correction Ch Power ACLR If activated the results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise correc tion must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise correc tion is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 211 Adapt to Signal Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to configure the measurEment with the
150. asurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IQ IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 EE Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 125 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Notation WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are
151. ation cene entretenir teae 36 Eau ELI i NO enuatrenl dv N 36 L Channel Bitstream ecce t nennt nen tnt nnan 37 L Composite Constellati fi 1 cac tract dira dte ecd ccrte rd 37 ee E Ee EE 38 ng cmo H 38 Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings In addition you can change the current settings via this dialog box R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mnAm V O IOO nemJVY e Code Domain Analysis Invert Q Off Capture Length 7 Center Frequency 1 29 GHz Set Count eu Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Set To Analyze 0 Ref Level 43 16 dBm Trigger Source Free Run Scrambling Code 0 Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Polarity Negative MA Shifts Cell 16 Preamplifier Off Trigger Offset 0 05 Sync To Slot Off Frontend IQ Capture DeScrambling Display Configuration Search Mode Auto Search Slot Number 0 Screen A CDP Inactive Threshold 40 0 dB Channel Number ZA Screen B Result Summary Code Power Relative Screen C Composite Const Normalize Off Screen D Channel Table Ch Table Sort Order Code Set to default Close To change the settings pre
152. bandwidths are speci fied in the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio to define the ratio VBW RBW Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OFF SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth Hz and resolution bandwidth Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command VBW RBW is reciprocal to that of the manual operation RBW VBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 01 to 1000 RST 3 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 res olution bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 199 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands EMG MLO MC B Mug 4 6 3 4 SENSe Subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE Mode This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path Changing the video filter position is possible only if the resolution bandwidth is 100 kHz Parameters Mode LiNear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier In linear mode measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared
153. ble bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the VBW display in the channel bar Note RMS detector and VBW If an RMS detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves For details on detectors see chapter 3 3 1 Detector Overview on page 104 This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth It is also available for Power vs Time measure ments Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 199 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 199 Video BW Auto Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected resolution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the longer
154. ce range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is extended to define additional settings e Tx Bandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC filter is activated For further details refer to chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 196 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 186 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 187 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 187 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 72 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RF Measurements Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings Power Classes EI x Used Power Classes All Y Power Glass PMin lt P lt PMax Power Class 1 INF Lens dBm Sweep List Power Class 2 Lens dBm 40 0 dBm Sweep List Power Class 3 40 0 dBm BT Sweep List Remove Used Power Classes Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Choose the power classes to be used from this dropdown menu It is only possible to select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power clas
155. ck of absolute limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measure ments The commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix n lt k gt Parameters lt State gt Example Selects the measurement window irrelevant ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on the ACLR limit check CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one specific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 148 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 2 3 3 CALCulate Subsystem To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end
156. ction Mode This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSV performs a reference measurement to determine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A corresponding message is displayed on the screen Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change Parameters Mode ON Performs noise correction OFF Performs no noise correction AUTO Performs noise correction After a parameter change noise correction is restarted automati cally and a new correction measurement is performed RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 211 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 6 3 6 SENSe Subsystem Example POW NCOR ON SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indi cated trace The corresponding trace must be active i e its state must be different from blank Note The measurement of the occupied bandwidth OBW is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To evaluate another trace marker 1 must be positioned to another trace with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Paramet
157. ctions m sun RF Measurements Span RBW Auto 100 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R amp S FSV This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 001 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 199 Span RBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 198 Default Coupling Coupling Ratio Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 This softkey is available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 197 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 199 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 217 Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type This softkey and its submenu are available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwi
158. d DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 3 3 1 Detector Overview on page 104 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer match
159. d off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time SENSe SWEep TYPE Type This command selects the sweep type Parameters Type SWE Selects analog frequency sweeps AUTO Automatically selects the sweep type FFT or analog frequency Sweep FFT Selects FFT sweeps RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 217 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands m A Mag eng SENSe Subsystem 4 6 3 7 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem SENSe AVERage n COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of meas urements sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode This command has the same effect as the SENSe lt source gt SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window Suffix n Selects the measurement wind
160. d power measurement in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If necessary the measurement is switched on prior to the query The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem To obtain a correct result a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 132 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt ResultType gt ACPower CPOWer ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence separated by com mas Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the number of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE is set to REL the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB CPOWer Chan
161. d ri fede 98 ACLR Coupling absolute limlE rt ertt eind re eieiei 63 Resolution bandwidth sess 93 adjacent channel name remote control 207 Sweep UME iet a er o ertet nh 95 100 alternate channel name remote control 207 Video bandwidlli econtra 94 Channel Bandwidth channel name remote control 207 D channel names eere retener errore 61 Channel Spacing X default scalings of x and y axis 0 0 0 ee cece creer 80 limit Check esent ttt eene Delete Limit Checking eessssees seen ed 27 number of channels eg detector reference ecececccccececeeeectecceccecceceeceeseeeteuteceecereesentnaes e RE 104 relative limit ener DiglConf Weighting Filter e UE 50 ASCII Trace export sssssssssseseeeneenene Digital IQ data attenuation GOVICG eene 48 option B25 ssssss see 41 91 Digital IQ Info Attenuation Remote control eren rnnt tnn 226 option B25 41 91 Softkey Automatic 40 91 Display Configuration Manual 40 90 225 Cic EE 28 Option B25 giereg 40 90 display range Auto level EE 78 79 88 89 Hysteresis sss 43 Display range Auto Peak detector sssss sss 104 Frequenoy EEN 18 38 83 Average detector Average trace mode s eee cee eeeeetenneeeeeneees 45 106 E B Electronic input attenuation Bo 229 Bandwidth EX IQ BOX 49 MGE
162. decree re thee DiglConf 90 Resolution m 8 OXPOM Le ul E 110 Vu EE external noise source o oo ee eee teeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 48 103 Blank trace mode viimoisen inaanzia 106 F C l FFT Filter Mode Center frequency ssssssseemree 18 38 83 Auto E CE ae En eleeri 84 Narrow es channel SOKEY ege eege eet fei ees SEI Or rr 59 75 Filters number lu M 107 spacing Selectitig icu etcetera eds 107 Channel Table Settings Dls 107 SOfIKOy ces Anais tih edet edere edite needs 23 Filter types Characters Hal E Speciali atico e 126 EMI 68B NENNEN Clear Write trace mode ssssssssseeee 44 105 Normal 3dB EE Commandes pim S Description eei iare ced dide teta 125 frequency CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA 167 OMSET serae E ER EEA 19 39 86 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle MSHift 168 CIC p EEN 85 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle ORDer 168 E 86 CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement 169 Frequency CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames 170 Center serieen E EE AE EEE 18 38 83 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOint we 170 Frequency menu ENNEN 83 Continuous sweep ssssseeeeeeeeeneenennnn 43 99 Frontend settings siririna aipear 18 Correction Full Scale Level inherent noise ssssss ttes 66 Digital Baseband IQ remote co
163. delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 138 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands ne en I M m A um CALCulate Subsystem lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is
164. der or midamble order Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 168 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCENMMCUQU R J H g HQ m qa CONFigure Subsystem Parameters CODE MIDamble CODE Channels are sorted in code order MiDamble Channels are sorted in midamble order RST CODE Example CONF CDP CTAB ORD Sorts the channels in code order Mode TDS CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the predefined channel tables Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO TDS CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt ChannelTable gt This command selects the channel table for a measurement In order to activate a pre defined channel table with this command you have to activate the RECENT channel table with the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe command first Parameters lt ChannelTable gt lt string gt name of the channel table RST RECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the channel table CTAB 1 Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement measurement This command selects the measurements of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Application Operating
165. describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 3 1 1 8 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements on page 47 MEU oon oet eios d utendi ved nente dut dated ener reer 103 Naise SOUE iive ecacacac cres ecco ena cnasagccad cveddedaasadavas daavats Dee deo ae desde Usa aO a caus ded rae aa 103 tee ss pL 103 e E EE 103 Hioc RI e 103 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 102 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions G a H s rmgaw 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 Further Information Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 226 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 234 Video Output Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID see OUTPut IF SOURce on page 237 Power Sensor F
166. dth BWIDth RESolution RATiO essen SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE SEN Se bewert geesde herede eee Dre eei edd ede dp dot Ei EM e Riede e tal el D SENSe CDPower IQbL ngth EE SENSe CDPowerEEVelADJUSE 3 accro petiit eae detent dE eege SENSe GDPOwWeFMMANX 5 ter iecore io rts PR gol dett pera e PERDE dere dp y a SENSe CDPower MSH ft eese nre e nre titre trennen terere enne SENSE ee e ele ET SENSe CDPOWer QINV E aii SENSe CDPower SBANd IENGeICDbower SCODE EEN EISE Re EE EISE e Re TEE ere LE SENSe er Reg Ba H EE SENSe GDPOwWer STSLOL rre oet itg ed deg Yee tope e D Y dede ge duy uat SENSe CDPower STSLot MODE sss nennen ennemi rre ENEAN EEKEREN enne SENSe CDPOower STSLEotROTt nii rette irte pe eoe ct ae Dar NEAS NEEE Eege SEENEN SENSe ESPectrum BW ID A SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC S TATe essen rennen nnne nne SENSe ESPectr m EighSP e d eer n I ir eti ed Ge ete der eed SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTOre eie nerit tnnt nne ttn oa Eo a Snob atn nda arbo aba ae Ead anao SENS ESPectrum PRESeE STORG na nora et teamed re peter d de Ye x E eee SENSe ESPectrum PRESet GT ANdard nennen nnne nennen TEE EE Operating Manual 1173
167. dth and the CCDF Instead of open ing a submenu this softkey opens the Sweep List dialog box to select the filter type when measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The submenu contains the following softkeys e Normal 3 dB e CISPR 6 dB e MIL Std 6 dB Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel e RRC e 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 98 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 2 7 6 RF Measurements For detailed information on filters see chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 and chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 107 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 198 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Contmuous SWOBD reir ien eee rn emer ehe le read tie a ee e a uer dee ete 99 SITING WSO o 99 Tute E endrerit cxt dee cene dare e ER Dre X ana ura a RR NaRa 99 Sweentinte Mantal DE 100 Vicini 100 ees m 100 Bo cR 101 u c E 101 D NIC r
168. e ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME yed in the result diagram and result table mote command ACHannel on page 207 ALTernate lt channel gt on page 207 CHANnel channel on page 207 Ej mM LH Weighting Filter Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define weighting filters for all channels Weighting filters are not available for all supported sta ndards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available The dialog contains the following fields Operating Manual 11 73 0743 02 06 61 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RF Measurements Field Description Channel e TX 1 18 TX channels e ADJ Adjacent channel e ALT1 11 Alternate channels Active Activates Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Alpha Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Remote command POW ACH FILT CHANI1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt on page 206 Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel on page 205 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for TX channel 1 to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ACH ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHann
169. e Starts the autorange routine for the reference level This also creates the relationship between trigger and subframe start Note that subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the autorange process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH AUTO LTIM WAI Starts the autorange and timing routine Usage Event Mode TDS SENSe POWer Commands The SENSe POWer subsystem configures the RF Power measurement SENSe POWer ACHannelAUTOTIMe eioirce iioc tout enean ENDRES b Paar Dn aaa 183 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT S Taf Tina iata dee tbt ci eR Rho denn inns 183 SENSe POWer ACHannel SEO T S TOP enee AER conde ate 183 SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe This command automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSV Current measurements are aborted when this command is executed and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Usage Event Mode TDS SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT lt StopSlot gt Sets the first slot of the measurement Parameters lt StartSlot gt The start slot may not be larger than the stop slot Range 1to7 RST 4 BTS 1 MS Example POW ACH SLOT STAR 2 Mode TDS SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP lt StopSlot gt Sets the last slot of the measurement Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 183 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remot
170. e 233 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements Parameters lt DelayTime gt 0sto30s RST Os Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 213 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MER MCCC A A B C pn SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth lt Timelnterval gt This command defines a gate length Parameters Timelnterval 125 ns to 30 s RST 400us Example SWE EGAT LENG 10ms SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz Parameters Source EXTernal IFPower VIDeo RFPower PSEN RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent Comment Defines a comment for one of the traces for
171. e Adjust Settings softkey sets the fre quency span as a function of the number of transmission channels the transmission channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adja cent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x adjacent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 9o ofthe value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth e Resolution bandwidth RBW To ensure both acceptable measurement speed and required selection to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be measured especially of the adjacent channels the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too large As a general approach the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 196 and 4 of the channel bandwidth A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution band width of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neigh borhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards the Adjust Settings softkey sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a
172. e Control Commands SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt StopSlot gt The stop slot may not be lower than the start slot In MS mode stop slots other than 1 require an external trigger Range 1to7 RST 6 BTS 1 MS Example POW ACH SLOT STOP 5 Mode TDS 4 6 3 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 4 6 3 1 SENSe ADJust Subsystem ERR DADA cosa cond ime b bn nae risu d tnde tds 184 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYS Teresis LOWer sess 184 SENS amp JADJ stCONFigutration HYS Teresis Uber 184 SENSe JADJust CONFigure LEVel DURatIOn 1 2 112 a aaa aaa 185 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE eseseeeeneeeeneenenennn nnn 185 SENSe ADJ st F el 185 Elle 186 SENSe ADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis
173. e ENTER key The selected channel table is the basis for future measure ments until you choose another or select Auto Search An active channel table must completely describe the supplied signal Using the softkeys customized channel tables can be defined or existing channel tables can be modified Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 166 New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings All three softkeys open a dialog box with the same layout and the same corresponding submenu The New softkey opens the New Channel Table dialog box In this dialog you can build a new channel table All fields are empty Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 24 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EAE U eem Code Domain Analysis The Copy softkey copies all elements ofthe selected channel table and opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box The name of the new channel table is set to Copy of Sour ceChannelTableName gt The Edit softkey opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding menu In this dialog box you can edit an existing channel table Note that changes are never saved automatically Remember to save your channel tables before ending the application Note Prerequisite The code domain analyzer requires an active channel 1 16 e g P CCPCH1 and a valid midamble in slot 0 for synchronization The parameters Scram b
174. e absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the upper lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the command the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALCUlLaAte lt n gt LIMit lt k gt sACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RESuLt It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between Switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Ope
175. e old spacing value Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal channel spacing A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing ALT1 ALT2 causes a change by the same factor in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Example In the default setting the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ is set to 40 kHz the spacing of all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 If starting from the default setting the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ALT4 is set to 150 kHz the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 1 5 to result in 180 kHz ALT5 210 kHz ALT6 240 kHz ALT7 If a ACLR or MC ACLR measurement is started all settings according to the standard including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set and can be adjusted afterwards Remote command ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel on page 210 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 209 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt channel gt on page 210 Names Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define user specific channel names for each channel The names defined here are dis pla R
176. e suffix lt n gt The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem Note If CPOWer is selected the number of adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs is set to 0 If ACPower is selected the number of adjacent chan nels is set to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already The channel adjacent channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters lt MeasType gt ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement with a single carrier signal CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal equiv alent to adjacent channel power measurement with NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 MCACpower Channel adjacent channel power measurement with several car rier signals OBANdwidth OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth CN Measurement of carrier to noise ratio CNO Measurement of carrier to noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band width Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 134 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Comm
177. e will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 175 Range Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis This softkey and its submenu are available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 88 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m Jueme RF Measurements Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see D
178. eactivated Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 180 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 27 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions i SSS a mesw Code Domain Analysis Channel Table Sort Order Result Settings You can sort channels in the Channel Table result display in two ways e Code Order first all midambles are listed then all control channels and last all data channels e Midamble Order allocates all control and data channels to the midambles they belong to and then sorts the midambles in ascending order Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle ORDer on page 168 Display Configuration This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display In the Code Domain Analyzer the results are displayed in up to four screens Any result can be dis played in either screen cor sw NN v Screen A active Result Diagram for Screen A Code Domain Power Channel Bitstream Composite EVM RMS Composite Constellation Peak Code Domain Error Code Domain Error Power Power vs Symbol Channel Power vs Slot Result Summary Channel Table Code Channel Constellation EVM vs Symbol The dialog box contains the following elements Item Description Screen A B C D tab Choose the screen to be configured Screen A B C D active Activate or deactivate one of the four available mea
179. ects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the IQ Capture Settings on page 19 and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 180 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 20 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions a EEH H X P M sd Code Domain Analysis Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 233 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 233 Trigger Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal
180. ed by commas 200 0 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 in ascending order separated by commas 200 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 149 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Example CALCulate Subsystem CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes lt 200 50 lt 50 50 gt lt 50 70 gt 70 200 Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum MODE Mode This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix n lt k gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example 1 4 window irrelevant AUTO MANUAL AUTO The limit line depends on the measured channel power MANUAL One of the three specified limit lines is set The selection is made with the chapter 4 2 3 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsys tem on page 149 command RST AUTO CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive State This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure ment It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined Also either only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected Suffix n lt k gt lt Class gt Parameters lt State g
181. eene een nnnrn retenta ted n eret sene resi ret rnnnr tentent sinn 234 e M Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 240 R amp S FSV K76 K77 List of Commands DISPlay WINDOW lt N gt SIZE c di 171 BISPlayEWINDowsn SSEL6GL irren cierre reri E Rr e og 171 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STAT EE 171 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACevlGCAetAlTO ener enn rnnrnnr enn nnt nennen seen 173 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACevlGCAl etMANimum nennen enne nennen nn nnnn nenne 173 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTRACevtGCALelMihNimum ener 174 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACING eene 176 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvTGCALel eene n entren nnne n nnns 173 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE sse nennen nennen nnn nennt nnn 174 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACect Wl SCALelb ivielon ene 174 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvTGCALeiRlEVel eene eene nnne 175 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACectvlSCALelbRlEvelOttz et eene 175 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvIGCALetRbOGmon nennen 175 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelbRVAlue eene neret nnne 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe FORMatDEXPort DSEPatalort 2 2 2 eden ecce ee idee epa ge it Eege INITiate lt n gt CONME8S A INITiatesn gt CONT NL EE INiTiate lt n gt te EE NEE RU En TE EE IV ANB uo EEEEEEEEEEMEMMEM INPubPAT Penuation AUTO E
182. eep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 105 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m Kr ns Further Information This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH See DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from se
183. either view one of the default files already stored on the R amp S FSV in the C r_s instr sem_std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element and are to be inserted where noted The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview Also no example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above Italic font shows the placeholders for the values e The BaseFormat element is structured as follows Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 112 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions a OO CC C oec n r Further Information RS SEM ACP FileFormat Version 1 0 0 0 gt lt Name gt Standard lt Name gt lt Instrument gt lt Type gt Instrument Type lt Type gt lt Application gt Application lt Application gt lt Instrument gt LinkDirection Name Name gt lt ReferencePower gt lt Method gt Method lt Method gt lt ReferencePower gt PowerClass Index n gt lt For contents of the PowerClass node see table 3 4 gt lt Define up to four PowerClass nodes gt lt PowerClass gt lt LinkDirection gt lt RS_SEM_ACP_File gt e The PowerClass element is st
184. el on page 205 Activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 205 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the adjacent channel to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ALT1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt on page 206 Activates the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel on page 205 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 to 0 35 Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate and define the limits for the ACLR measurement Limit Checking Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate limit checking for the ACLR measurement The following rules apply for the limits A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel The limit applies to both the upper and the lower adjacent channel A relative and or absolute limit can be defined The check of both limit values can be activated independently The R amp S FSV checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the limits are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute or rel Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 62 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions REENEN RF Measurements
185. el table The currently active channel table cannot be deleted Result Settings This softkey opens the Result Settings dialog box Common Settings Channel Code Number 1 16 p Absolute 6 Relative Normalize On e Off Code Power Channel Table Settings Ch Table Sort Order Code Midamble Slot Number Result Settings Selects the slot number for further evaluation In result displays that evaluate specific slot the currently selected slot is highlighted red The number of measured slots depends on the IQ Capture Settings defined in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Therefore the range is 0 to Capture Length 1 Remote command CDP SLOT 6 Channel Code Number Result Settings Selects the channel or code number for further evaluation In result displays that evaluate specific channels the currently selected channel is highlighted red The number of codes depends on the spreading factor Therefore it is between 1 and 16 Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 181 Code Power Result Settings Selects the y axis scaling for the Code Domain Power result display e Absolute scaling shows the code power in dBm e Relative scaling shows the code power in dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Normalize Result Settings Activate this parameter to eliminate the DC offset from the signal By default the param eter is d
186. en selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following for mula Paus HE RMS N i where s linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per measurement point Paus power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detec tor would yield less stable results e Trace averaging The Adjust Settings softkey switches off this function Averaging which is often per formed to stabilize the measurement results leads to a too low level indication and should therefore be avoided The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be measured e Reference level The Adjust Settings softkey does not influence the reference level It can be adjusted separately using the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey see Adjust Ref Lvl on page 38 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 123 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 1 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 7 4 8 4 9 Remote Control Commands This chapter describes the remote comma
187. ence range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges For details see Symmetric Setup on page 70 Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for Fast SEM mode see chap ter 3 3 9 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 119 3 3 6 ASCII File Export Format The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon File contents header and data section Description Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 50 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 96 Y axis reference position Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 110
188. ent window t irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 175 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Parameters Position Example DISPlay Subsystem 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corresponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt Value gt Example irrelevant irrelevant RST 0 dB coupled to reference level DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt ScalingType gt Example Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 Selects the measurement window irrelevant LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale 176 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 5 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 3 1 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 3 4 6 3 4 4 6 3 5 4 6 3 6
189. ents near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 197 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 212 Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep e Entry via rotary knob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points e Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set The default value is 691 sweep points This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 216 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter
190. enu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Application It is possible that your instrument con figuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description This menu contains the following softkeys ep pM UE 38 EEE ELE 7e RH 38 FREGUCNCYONSCE EE 39 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s fcenter E fmax e spanqi 2 span 0 0 HZ lt foenter S fmax fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 200 Center Stepsize This softkey is identical to the Manual on page 85 softkey for RF measurements This softkey is available for code domain and power vs time measurements Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 38 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 1 1 3 Code Domain Analysis Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 202 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu The following tab
191. ep time Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 141 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 2 3 2 CALCulate Subsystem lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CO
192. equency remote control Ref Point Level remote control Ref Point Time remote control Ref Value remote control PT 8 Ref Value Position remote control Res BW Eege Res BW remote control Res BW Auto remote control 197 198 Res BW Manual remote control 197 Restore Standard Files Save As Standard sssessssesee Save As Standard remote control 189 Save Evaluation List remote control SCAIING ER Search Limits remote control Search Lim Off remote control ei Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Select e ntt Select Trace remote control Set CP Refererice Ed neret rini Set Standard remote control Settings Single Meas remote control ss Single Sweep remote control Span RBW Auto 50 is Span RBW Manual ses Span Manual EE Span Manual remote control SEAM MM Start remote control sessssssssssss Start Frequency remote control Se e MEET Stop remote control esses Stop Frequency remote control Sweep CoOUnt crt t ers Sweep List remote control
193. er lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 136 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands b H n CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The correction values for the bandwidth and
194. erations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 212 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements The following list shows all softkeys available in the Trace menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE measurement applications for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit ecran c ERES 44 IST Ans c MENORES PME 44 MIA OIG MT 45 D o m Y 45 bU ETE ate ea tute dessicated tae a heatiseaaneatetanenecsooneed 45 Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 44 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mLAmIE P g Code Domain Analysis This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote comman
195. eresis Ru cl M EE EEN 43 V VBW RMS detector orto 94 105 Video bandwidthi et tret ern tren 94 View trace mode entrer 45 106 Ww weighting filter icc Deeg aree Dec eae 61 Z Zoom elei rei edere eine d rx i ER S 45 106 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 249
196. ers lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 SENSe SWEep subsystem SENSe SWEep COUNL cesses tnttentnttenetettet tette tette te test tes 212 EE e ME 213 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff eccentric 213 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth cec t te ttntet teet ttttettts 214 EE De BC EE 214 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURCGO retener trn EAR RE e RR RR ERE rn AR nea 214 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k COMMAnt aae cucc nta nectit a agna a Dacus 214 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERI OGd 2 ceti ene eek dee esa aeneae 214 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STARt range sss 215 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range sese eene 215 SENSE SWEGp EGATBEDYIBE TE 215 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt GTOborange z enne 216 E LEE doll icc onc cecey eed ence cane iecec neh en data sadanadeodevednes inkakuna aiaiai kita diana 216 GEN E 217 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO ccce tentent tenete t tette t totes 0d 217 I SENSGISWESDBA d EE 217 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 212 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Rem
197. es the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 45 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Se a O A H sme Code Domain Analysis 3 1 1 7 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurements The following list shows all softkeys available in the Trigger menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE measurement applications for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Trigger Source Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 233 Trigger Source External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt
198. ey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 230 EI Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu
199. f a softkey is only avail able with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description For Spurious Emission Measurements the settings are defined in the Sweep List dialog see the description in the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 92 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m RF Measurements NET LEE 93 Res BW AVIO vie bbana poesia Mesa MO ID T 93 video BW Manual EE 94 Video BW te EE 94 SwWeepime Manual ET 94 ser EE 95 EE KE 95 E E 96 2 EE 96 Dee AE E E E A 96 L FFT Filter Mode 96 on MT 96 Eege 96 eec o M 96 L RBW VBW Sine DILL 97 L REW VEW Pulse d EE 97 L RBW VBW Noise TO 97 L RBW VBW Manual 97 L Span RBW Auto 100 EE 98 L Span RBW Manual 98 L KE E 98 zlii 98 Res BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chap ter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DNARROW key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upward
200. f the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer lEVelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 225 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 90 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m ur RF Measurements RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 225 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator
201. following softkeys Auto Level amp Time Adapt to Signal Ch Power ACLR The Auto Level and Time softkey automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSV Current measurements are aborted when pressing the softkey and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 183 Start Slot Adapt to Signal Ch Power ACLR Sets the first slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT on page 183 Stop Slot Adapt to Signal Ch Power ACLR Sets the last slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 183 Spectrum Emission Mask Performs a comparison of the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified in the standard For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Spectrum Emission Mask Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 66 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions A R A smm Pg RF Measurements Also opens the Spectrum Emission Mask submenu containing the following softkeys Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 169 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower BTS RE
202. for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory set values are restored Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 152 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands ae R OEEU n P E nHng 4 2 3 4 CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the default setting CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue lt Power gt This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value one of the predefined limit lines is selected Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Power gt 33 28 0 33 P233 28 28 P 33 0 P 28 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 CALCulate MARKer subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event O
203. function of the channel bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 122 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions ma w E X O Y J V Further Information RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW lt 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected e Video bandwidth VBW For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video band widths The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three times the resolution bandwidth VBW 2 3x RBW The Adjust Settings softkey sets the video bandwidth VBW as a function of the channel bandwidth see formula above and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size will be selected e Detector The Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS detector This detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measure ment point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has be
204. gated triggering Suffix ko 1 6 trace Parameters Comment Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod Value This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 214 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Cn TS A u s S ay SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Parameters Value numeric value RST 0s Example SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt Value This command defines the starting point for the range to be traced using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1 3 range Parameters Value numeric value RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt State This command activates or deactivates tracing for a specific range using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1 3 range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRACI STAT1 ON Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE Type This comma
205. ge gt FILTer TYPE c ecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeaeaeaeaeneneeenes 190 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARL ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeeeeneteneees 190 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP 2 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 191 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez INbPutATTenuation nn 191 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGe zangez INbPutATTenuaton AUTO 192 IGENZGeJCGbechum RANGe zangez INPuGAIN STATe nnne 192 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez N ert esee 192 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source ABSolute STARt seesusss 193 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source ABSolute S TOP osseeeesss 193 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit source RELative STARt esee 193 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source RELative STOP eesseesss 194 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGe zangez LUMitzeourcez GTATe rer errersrrnr nene 194 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGe zangez RLEVel iiinis 195 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME 195 IGENGeIECGbechum RANGe rangez GMEep TIME AUTO 195 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSducer sese 196 SENS amp 3ESPecirumRRANge iic erre exa den tu eae d ee pa ege ENEE 196 SENSE JE SPECTER TY Pe a rra epe anges ex apex uo en dun eaae a XR ERR RR EROR paa 196 This command defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power reference range This setti
206. gger event Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Delay This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix n irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 232 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands mm M uJ n UE S Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters Delay Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt TriggerLevel gt This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V TRIGger lt n gt SEQ
207. gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 3 3 6 ASCII File Export Format on page 110 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 234 Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Trace 1to6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut IF SOURce Source This command selects the source of the IF output Parameters lt Source gt IF intermediate frequency output VIDeo video output 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector OUTPut TRIGger PortLevel This command selects level of the Trigger Out port Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 237 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG HIGH SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In rem
208. gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 217 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 217 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSV specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 202 Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function e g a fast change between over view measurement and detailed measurement is possible Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements The following table shows all
209. gt MARKer lt m gt TRACE eene enennn nennen nennen sinn nnns nnn nnns e rtr nennt nne n nnne nena 157 CAEGCulatesn z MARKoer emo X aceite en tt Aedes ats eam A Ete Pet core ode e Ded ae etn Rea Ee Fue de vd eo Ld aane pidan 157 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZO OM sse nennen nnn nhnrn nen nnnnt sene rnnn nennen tenen 158 CAlLCulate cnzM AbkercmzX GL lMtslGTATel ener 157 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERCent CALC latesn gt E EA EE 158 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe sees enne nnren nennt nnrreneren teret rnree nnne enn en nnns CAL Culate cnz DEA searchlbGtarch AUTO CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin esee nnne nren tenens CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHoOw ssssssssesssseeseee eene nennen nnrn net ent nsn nene sinn nnne nnn CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate esee eene nnne CAL Culatecnz GTATlsticeCCDETESTATel eene en nemen ennrntr nnn hent nsn nene snnt nnns nnn CALCulatecnzGTATlsticehNGAMoles A CALC latesn gt STA REN ET EE CALCulatecnzGTATlsticebREGutTracez A CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlexhRAhNGe nennen nent n et nnen sn nrnn dinh renr set rene tnn ten nnne nn CALC l te lt sn gt STATIStics SCALEXRLEVeh teneret nnne aeiae iiaae Naa SE RARA CALCulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlevLOWer A CALCulatesn gt STATisticS e
210. hannels are output in dBm the powers of the adjacent channels in dBm The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results Repro ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period As a general approach it can be assumed that approx 500 non correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 5 dB 99 of the measurements are within 0 5 dB of the true measured value This holds true for white noise The measured values are considered as non correlated if their time interval cor responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx 25 kHz i e measured values at an interval of 40 us are considered as non correlated A measurement time of 40 ms is thus required per channel for 1000 measured values This is the default sweep time which the R amp S FSV sets in coupled mode Approx 5000 measured values are required for a repro ducibility of 0 1 dB 99 96 i e the measurement time is to be increased to 200 ms Remote command SENSe POWer HSPeed on page 211 Set CP Reference Ch Power ACLR Defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value if channel power measurement is activated The reference value is displayed in the Tx1 Ref Power field the default value is 0 dBm The softkey is available only for multi carrier ACLR measurements In adjacent channel power me
211. hannels contained in the signal If channels are not detected as being active change the Inactive Channel Threshold or select the Predefined channel search type Predefined Performs the code domain measurement on the basis of the active pre defined channel table All channels of a channel table are assumed to be active For further details also refer to the Inactive Channel Thresh old field and the Predefined Channel Tables Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 165 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 169 Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Table Settings Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive The parameter is available in the Auto Search mode of the Channel Table Settings dialog box The default value is 40 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the TD SCDMA test models are located by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inactive Channel Threshold value if not all chan nels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICThreshold on page 178 Channel Tables Channel Table Settings In this field a list of the available channel tables is shown To activate a predefined channel table select the table name by using either the touchscreen or the the cursor keys and pressing th
212. hat is defined by the 3GPP2 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions Below the measurement screen a table showing the peak list In the peak list the values for the worst spectral emissions are displayed including their frequency and power The default settings of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement are listed in the table below Parameter Default Value Frequency Span 8 MHz Sweep Time 20 ms Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement refer to the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey in the Measurement menu Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which the signal power can be found By default the bandwidth is displayed in which 9996 of the signal is found The percentage of the signal power included in the measurement can be modified In the top right corner of the screen the bandwidth and frequency markers are displayed The default settings of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement are listed in the table below Parameter Default Value Occupied Bandwidth ON Frequency Span 4 8 MHz Sweep Time 1 3s RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Detector RMS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 52 R
213. he range SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 193 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem Parameters Limit 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STAR 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the start frequency of the range SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Limit 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STOP 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the stop frequency of the range SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt STATe State This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges Suffix lt range gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Checks only the relative limits Relative limits are defined as rela tive to the measured power in the reference r
214. he rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys e To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 10 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Preface I M How to Use the Help System 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Selectthe suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window gt Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 11 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Introduction 2 Introduction Equipped with the firmware application R amp S FSV K76 the R amp S FSV performs code domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP standard Third Generation Partnership Project Equipped with the firmware application R amp S FSV K77 the R amp S FSV performs code domain measurements on downlink signals according to the 3GPP standard Third Ge
215. her value is retained If activated the enhancement label Pwr Max is displayed Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH See CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 132 Select Trace CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trace number on which the CP ACLR measurement is to be performed Only activated traces can be selected For details on trace modes see chapter 3 3 2 Trace Mode Overview on page 105 Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 212 ACLR Abs Rel CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Switches between absolute and relative power measurement in the adjacent channels Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dByV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 206 Adjust Settings CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 3 3 11 Optimized Sett
216. idth BWIDth esee nennen neret rennen rese ni 211 EIST Ee TT EE 211 SENS POWer NCORFECHON vin lt cscescesiccasoncaesecssisnencendsrdentendsmcenschceacensnessenstoseedoudenestdennendshtapcsnmensendatdenteaobecs 211 SENSe POWer TRACe SENSe SWEep COUNt SENSe SWEEPiEGAT RE SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDOoff trarre recep rna te dba Een in eni aio ne V ena gue Ee EEN SENSe SWESp EGATS6 LENGI iie iced ie pace e eie e Eae MEE ETC EE dE EE dee Foe SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity 11er eene iintindi daidan iiaeaae anke En aea Ra andaina SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURGe 5 erret tnr innere HESS EE E Lane e rade eeu dna rnb SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k PERIod nennen nnree nere en nennen SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt GTOberange z nennen nre n neret SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k COMMent sessssessesesseeeneenneeneeenneen ren nnreen rennen ense n reset senes SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt IGENZGe GwWEepnEGAhte RACeck GtAtfecrangezl eene enne 215 ISENSe JSWE6p EGATE IY PE x 215 EISE e Mell CN 216 SENSe EE TIME E 217 SENS SWESp TIME AUTO aet tr ipe o ERR b dee edge gae pd ea de gn dh 217 JEN ETIAM h i mS 217 OS Ee Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 244 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Index A coupling defai lt Settings cci ee
217. ignal statistic SCPI Conformity information esses 125 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 246 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Index scrambling code Mir M 22 Select Ch Slot rij 38 sensitivity APD measurement sss esee 80 CCDF measurement 5 neret 80 Settings Overview Lj 17 Signal Source l Q Analyzer TT Remote control kl E Aine nicae T 0 1 Demod BW K7 Oo RBW O 0 1 RBW remote control ssssss 201 0 1 Span 0 5 RBW 0 5 Span 0 5 Span remote control of Adj Chen iiec orte ttr of Adj Chan remote control 183 203 of Samples of Samples remote control of TX CMAN een erret tnr of TX Chan remote control Power Bandwidth sess Power Bandwidth remote control 211 ACLR Abs Rel remote control ACLR Ref Setting remote control ACLR Ref Spacing remote control oak E Adjust Ref Level A Adjust Ref Level remote control Adjust Settings remote control APD remote control eessseseeeee 162 ASCII File Export remote control Auto remote control Ato All in feet tie cdot erences C N remote control
218. imit Check 1 4 Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the type of limit check for all ranges For details on limit checks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Abs Limit Start on page 69 Abs Limit Stop on page 69 Rel Limit Start on page 69 Rel Limit Stop on page 70 Depending on the number of active power classes see Power Class dialog box the number of limits that can be set varies Up to four limits are possible The sweep list is extended accordingly Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt STATe on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 148 Abs Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 69 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt on page 193 Abs Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 69 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit
219. indow lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 140 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt 0 to maximum frequency or swe
220. ings CCDF Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parame ters on page 122 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 207 Power vs Time Starts the Power vs Time measurement This measurement is required by the standard for the Emission Envelope Mask For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Power vs Time Also opens the Power vs Time submenu containing the following softkeys Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 169 Switching Point Power vs Time Opens a dialog box to enter the switching point The switching point is between 1 and 6 and defines the border of uplink slots and downlink slots Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOint on page 170 Start Meas Power vs Time Starts the measurement and does a single sweep Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 235 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 236 No of Subframes Power vs Time Defines the number of subframes that the R amp S F
221. ings for CP ACLR Test Parame ters on page 122 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 207 Sweep Time Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time With the RMS detector a longer sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 64 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m J H m RF Measurements The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the Band width menu Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 217 Fast ACLR On Off Ch Power ACLR Switches between the IBW method Fast ACLR Off and the zero span method Fast ACLR On When switched on the R amp S FSV sets the center frequency consecutively to the different channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measurement time sweep time number of channels The RBW filters suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used e g root raised cos with IS 136 For details on available channel filters see chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results Therefore this requires no software correction factors Measured values are output as a list The powers of the transmission c
222. inimum span of a range is 20 Hz The individual ranges must not overlap but need not directly follow one another The maximum number of ranges is 20 A minimum of three ranges is mandatory The reference range cannot be deleted it is marked in blue color The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 109 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information e The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth e Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Symmetrical ranges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of the center range are defined symmectrically In the Sweep List menu select the Symmetrical Setup softkey to activate symmetrical setup mode The current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the refer
223. ize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Marker CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step Size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 200 Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency The following range of values is allowed Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 85 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 2 7 3 RF Measurements fmin s fstart s fmax Spannin fmin fmax and Span jn are specified in the data sheet This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 202 Stop Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency The following range of values for the stop frequency is allowed fmin Spanmin s Fstop s fmax f min f max and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet This softkey i
224. ker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis If marker 2 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker it is switched to marker mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB sta tistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 157 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM lt State gt This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area Note The function is only available if the search limit for mar
225. ker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM Z00M ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a marker The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode if necessary To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Return values Result The measured value of the selected marker is returned Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 158 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands AL n ns wung 4 2 3 5 CALCulate Subsystem Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERCent lt Probability gt This command positions the selected marker to the gi
226. l 184 Status Reporting System of the TD SCDMA Measurement Applications K76 K77 SEENEN EELER 219 TRACe Subsystoern EE 220 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eenenneneeee 225 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 124 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 9 1 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 1 Notation INP t cormahds edic tetas ee inre cece opbeetacetwxasducevvedaletacussiae Pater gege 225 TRIGger Commande 231 Other Referenced Commande 234 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the indi vidual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station me
227. l lol Tc 67 e l EE 68 d o MET 68 eege 68 L Sweep Time Mode 68 E o NI NN ERR 68 2 31 Met 68 L RF Att NCO 68 LASE EEU e pE 68 EE 69 L Transd Fach 69 Mini E 69 m Dnit A 69 L EE 69 i bor 69 De DM DELIS NENNEN 70 L Close Sweep Lig tas snesaix dnas EENEG 70 L Insert before Range 70 L i 1 MERDA 70 Do dro EE 70 ED IDE DISENO ahaenrundunnmentundhacansneuandiunaandes 70 L Edit Reference Range 71 L Edit Reference Rare snnt asa aro Ra kin nda nonoui 72 L Edit Power EE 73 L Used Power Classes 73 DT ANN ET 73 L duse d EEN 74 RF Measurements E P HR EE 74 D cuoc MERE 74 L Save As Standard E 74 VEERSE EE 74 L Restore Standard File cncacescccauesscasstocanessadesasadduerssvseataaadincventdvartiaviasetadaveassans 74 L Adapt to EE 75 L Auto Level en EEN 75 e Sae EE 75 EE 75 Oceupied BANG WIG EE 75 L Power Bandwidth span gt OD 75 L Channel Bandwidth span gt OD 75 L Adaptto Signal nose dterim peine eere dpa vla iei ud en rud 76 L Auto Level amp Time 76 EE 76 Do lo 76 L Adj st Setia cios eelst 76 cs X 76 ER Papcant MiBef E 76 et M C T 77 e AE 77 E NNN NNMERO MeL TRECE 77 L x Axis Ref Leni EEN 77 o 1 0 Tr 77 L Range L
228. le shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE measurement applications for CDA and Power vs Time measure ments Note The softkeys in the Amplitude menu for other RF measurements are described in chapter 3 2 7 4 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements on page 87 This menu contains the following softkeys Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 175 Scale Opens a submenu with the following softkeys This softkey and its submenu is available for code domain and Power vs Time measure ments Auto Scale Once Scale Automatically scales the y axis of the grid of the selected screen with respect to the measured data The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO on page 173 Y Axis Maximum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the maximum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum on page 173 Operating Manual 11
229. ling Code and MA Shifts Cell must comply with the base station The dialog box contains the following items You can modify the white fields as you like The grey fields can not be modified these are automatically calculated by the R amp S FSV Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table which will be saved under lt name gt xml The name is case sensitive and may not contain spaces It must be a valid MS Windows file name Note that the old channel table file is not deleted Description Enter further information about the channel table MA Shift Cells Sets the maximum number of usable midamble shifts of the base station Channel Type Select one of the channel types from the dropdown menu Walsh Ch SF Enter the Channel Number Ch and Spreading Factor SF For some channel types the possible values are limited or preset e g F PICH F TDPICH and F PDCH Data Rate kbps Display of the data rate Modulation Enter the modulation type for the channel Midamble Shift Shift of the associated midamble if a common or default midamble allocation is detected State Indicates whether a channel is active or inactive Domain Conflict A red bullet indicates if there s a conflict of any sorts between two or more chan nels e g two conflicting channel codes Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAM CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY Eri
230. low the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the upper lt
231. lower1GHz xml LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_20_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_05_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_10_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_15_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_20_0_MHz xml LTE UL SS ll es Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 118 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 3 9 Further Information Used abbreviations BC band class UL uplink DL downlink TTA Telecommunications Technology Association Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements In order to improve the performance of the R amp S FSV for spectrum emission mask meas urements a Fast SEM mode is available If this mode is activated several consecutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally which makes the measurement considerably more efficient The displayed results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges Thus measurement settings that apply only to the results such as limits or transducer factors can nevertheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply e The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps e The following sweep settings are identical Filter Type see Filter
232. lowing abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV K76 K77 Contents 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 3 1 1 5 3 1 1 6 3 1 1 7 3 1 1 8 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 7 1 3 2 7 2 3 2 7 3 3 2 7 4 3 2 7 5 Contents LN E 7 Documentation Overview esses eene nennen ennt nennen nnn nnne n nnn nnn nnns 7 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene 9 Typographical Conventions eren enne nere 9 Conventions for Procedure Descrtpoions nenn 9 How to Use the Help System eese enne nnne nnns 10 Jude TE d ENSE 12 Instrument d e CN 13 Code Domain Analysis eeeeiier eee cee rient e e ruuan pn tn tte nua ana nn Lan kx a Ranae DDa NEESS 14 Menu and Softkey Descnpton eene nnns 15 Softkeys of the Code Domain Anahyzer enn 16 Softkeys of the Frequency Mem 38 Softkeys of the Amplitude Mem 39 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu 42 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 43 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements 44 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurements 2 cccccceceeeceeeceteeteeeeeneees 46 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements 47 RF Measuremente E 51 Signal Channel POWE EE 51 Adjacent Channel Power CH Power ACLR e 51 Spectrum Emission ON 52 Occupied Bandwidth
233. lt Value Span Zero Span Sweep Time 2 4 ms RBW 1 28 MHz VBW 10 MHz Trace Mode Average For details on the softkeys of the Power vs Time measurement refer to the Power vs Time softkey in the Measurement menu Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 53 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 2 7 3 2 7 1 3 2 7 2 3 2 7 3 3 2 7 4 3 2 7 5 3 2 7 6 3 2 7 7 3 2 7 1 RF Measurements Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K76 K77 The following chapter describes the softkeys and menus available for RF measurements in 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Applications All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there Softkeys of the Measurement Men 54 Softkeys of the Frequency Men 83 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurement seen 86 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurement sene 87 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Men 92 Softkeys of the Sweep MeMu cccecccceeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneeeeeeeeennseaeeeeeeeseneaaeeeeeeeeenenees 99 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements sss 102 Softkeys of the Measurement Menu The TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Applications provide the various test meas urements and result displays All measurements are accessed via the MEAS key The following list shows all softkeys available in the Measurement menu of the TD SCDMA BIG and UE Measurement Application It is possible that your instrument con figura
234. lt source gt ABSolute STOP on page 193 Rel Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the range dBc Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 69 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m ueeer RF Measurements This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 69 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt on page 193 Rel Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Sweep List dialog box on page 67 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP on page 194 Close Sweep List Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Closes the Sweep List dialog box and updates the measurement results Insert before Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to
235. lts like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix n irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated continu ous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 235 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CL ees Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT ESP Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated number of measure
236. m PCLass Class EXCLusive sss CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechumRtEGTore enne rennen nnne n nnn nnnn nnn CALCulatecnzLlMitck EGbechumVAl ue tenen tnn i ennnn sent nntn ent nn sete rnt denn rnt sena CALOCulate n LIMitck FAIL sese CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNGCHon CDbowert BITGIREGu 130 CAL Culatecnz MAbRkercmz AOEEF se nnenenethnn anth nnns nh nrnis ein thti isi tnnt esit estne t tine sinn nnt sn nnn 153 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE esses eene enne nnne innen nenne 132 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUItPHZ essent 133 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz EUNGCion POWerRE Gu 132 H Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 239 R amp S FSV K76 K77 List of Commands CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion POWer GE ec 134 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MAvimum LEET 154 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MAvimum NENT 154 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mzMAximum HIGH 155 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz MAimumf PDEART nennen enne nensennnnenr nne nenn nennen nina 154 CALCulate n2 MARKer m MINimum LEFT sss eene nner nennen nnne rnnr sinn nnne nnn 155 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimumNENT ene nenn enne enn nenne et nnr ten rns sen rn snnt enn 155 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHLE esses eene eene ener ne nnne nennen enn 156 CAL Culate nz MAbker mzMiNimumf PDEART ener eene nnne nnnr nnne nnn nt nnn 156 CALCulate lt n
237. mand activates or deactivates the list evaluation Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin lt Margin gt This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt Margin gt 200 to 200 dB RST 200 dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 160 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt 1 to 50 RST 25 Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list 4 2 3 6 CALCulate STATistics subsystem CALCulatesm gt STATistics CODF ST
238. mands SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower NORMalize boolean This command activates or deactivates the elimination of the IQ offset from the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP NORM ON Activates normalization Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower QINVert State This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower SBANd lt NORMal INVers gt This command is used to swap the left and right sideband Parameters lt NORMal INVers RST NORM Example CDP SBAN INV Switches the right and left sideband Mode CDMA EVDO TDS SENSe CDPower SCODe numeric value This command sets the scrambling code of the base station Parameters numeric value Range 0 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SCOD 28 Sets scrambling code 28 Mode TDS SENSe CDPower SET lt SetNo gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis The number of sets has to be defined with the SENSe CDPower SET command before using this command Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 180 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PEEMGNEGEENMMCENMMCUQ ARA a wen SENSe Subsystem Par
239. ments For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Auto All Performs all automatic settings e Auto Freq on page 42 e Auto Level on page 42 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 184 Auto Freq Defines the center frequency automatically by determining the highest frequency level in the frequency span This function uses the signal counter thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 185 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings softkey Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 186 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 42 e Meas Time Auto on page 43 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 42 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 185 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 42 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions a SE ee
240. ments With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 236 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands nQun H UH n Qn M Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName
241. mission Mask Sets the last slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 183 Occupied Bandwidth Starts measurement of the bandwidth assigned to the signal For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Occupied Bandwidth Also opens the Occupied Bandwidth submenu containing the following softkeys Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 169 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 130 Power Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth Values from 1096 to 99 996 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth on page 211 Channel Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the test parameters for details see chapter 3 3 11 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 122 The default setting is 14 kHz For measurements in line with a specific transmission standard the bandwidth specified by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 203 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 75 R amp
242. mote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command sets the upper limit level for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always ends at 200 dBm i e the upper limit of the last power class can not be set If more than one power class is in use the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum lt Level gt This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always start at 200 dBn i e the first lower limit can not be set If more than one power class is in use the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous power class Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric_value gt RST 200 for class1 otherwise 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines
243. n eration Partnership Project The basic standards are 3GPP TS 25 142 Base Station Conformance Testing TDD version V8 1 0 3GPP TS 25 221 Physical channels and mapping of transport channels onto physical channels TDD When TD SCDMA specifications are mentioned in the document this standard is meant In addition to the code domain measurements specified in the TD SCDMA standard the firmware application features measurements in the spectral range such as channel power adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings Overview of the Firmware Options R amp S FSV K76 and R amp S FSV K77 This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K76 and R amp S FSV K77 It covers operation via menus and the remote control commands for the 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS and UE Measurement Application To open the TD SCDMA BTS and UE measurement application e Press the MODE key and select TDS BTS R amp S FSV K76 or TDS UE R amp S FSV K77 from the softkey menu The TD SCDMA main menu opens This is identical to the Measurement menu MEAS key Note that you can return to the main menu anytime by pressing either the MEAS key or the HOME key This part of the documentation contains of the following topics Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 12 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 Instrument Functions
244. n Therefore we recommend you make a copy of an existing file see Save As Standard softkey and edit the copy of the file Alternatively edit the settings using the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey and the Sweep List dialog box and save the XML file with the Save As Standard softkey after wards This way no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself Basically the file consists of three elements that can be defined e The BaseFormat element e The PowerClass element e The Range element les Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 111 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m P Further Information The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 3 3 In the example above PowerClass 39 43 xml under C r_s instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP see figure 3 2 these attributes are defined as follows e Standard W CDMA 3GPP e LinkDirection DL e PowerClass 39 43 dBm The PowerClass element It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about the p
245. n 3 MHz Measurement BW 1 6 MHz Number of adjacent channels 0 Adjacent Channel Power On For details on the softkeys of the Signal Channel Power measurement refer to the Power softkey in the Measurement menu 3 2 2 Adjacent Channel Power CH Power ACLR The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyses the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX channel The number of TX channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class Below the measurement screens the bandwidth and power of the TX channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are displayed The other screen elements match those of the spectrum analyzer in the base unit The configuration of the measurement and the default settings comply to the TD SCDMA requirements Parameter Default Value Adjacent Channel Power On ACP Standard TD SCDMA Number of Adjacent Channels 2 TEE EE Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 51 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 2 3 3 2 4 RF Measurements For details on the softkeys of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement refer to the Ch Power ACLR softkey in the Measurement menu Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spectral mask t
246. n change the settings manually or via XML files The XML files offer a quick way to change the configuration A set of ready made XML files for different standards is already provided For details see table 3 6 You can also create and use your own XML files for details see chapter 3 3 7 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 111 All XML files are stored under C r_s instr sem_std Use the Load Standard softkey for quick access to the available XML files see Load Standard on page 74 Table 3 6 Provided XML files Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics cdma2000 DL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO DL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL cdma2000 UL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO UL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 116 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass_31_39 xml W CDMA 3GPP 31 39 dBm DL PowerClass_39_43 xml W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL PowerClass_43_INF xml W CDMA 3GPP 43 INF dBm DL PowerClass neglNF 31 xml W CDMA 3GPP INF 31 dBm DL WIBRO DL PowerClass 29 40 xml WiBro TTA 29 40 dBm DL PowerClass 40 INF xml WiBro TTA 40 INF dBm DL PowerClass neglNF 29 xml WiBro TTA INF 29 dBm DL WIBRO UL PowerClass_23_INF xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL PowerClass_negINF_23 xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL WIM
247. n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 233 Trg Gate Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger gate source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all trigger modes with the exception of the Free Run Power Sensor and Time mode This softkey is available for RF measurements For details also see Using Gated Sweep Operation in the base unit description Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 233 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 46 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 1 1 8 Code Domain Analysis offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigge
248. n zero span 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 230 INPut EATT on page 229 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 91 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EGER MCLO d omni 3 2 7 5 o RF Measurements Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 175 Ref Level Position Opens an edit di
249. nate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz and so on Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 209 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MER MCCC A A B C pn SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel ALT1 ALT2 A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing causes a change by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Example POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100 kHz Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent channel 1 ALT1 from 40 kHz to 100 kHz In consequence the spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adjacent channels is increased by the factor 100 40 2 5 ALT2 150 kHz ALT3 200 kHz ALT4 250 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel lt Spacing gt This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 14 kHz to 20 GHz RST 20 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC CHAN 25kHz
250. nd sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values can be defined see SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f on page 213 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 215 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCENMMCUQ ARA H U orese M e SENSe Subsystem Parameters Type LEVel EDGE LEVel The gate is level triggered After detection of the gate signal the gate remains open until the gate signal disappears The gate opening time cannot be defined with the command SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f Note Using gating with gate mode level and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 233 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements EDGE The gate is edge triggered After detection of the set gate signal edge the gate remains open until the gate delay SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f has expired RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt Value This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1
251. nds specific to the TD SCDMA Analysis option R amp S FSV K76 K77 The abbreviation TDS stands for the operating mode of this option For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 4 1 Notation on page 125 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the correspond ing subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the specific commands described in chapter 4 2 CALCulate Subsystem on page 127 e FORMat subsystem e INITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e MMEM subsystem e OUTput subsystem e SENSe subsystem except for the specific commands described in chapter 4 6 SENSe Subsystem on page 177 e TRIGger subsystem Notation cionan aa E EE ciii diii eh aside nad 125 CALCulate SubSySte im seis cccccccicccdscceicctecsncccedecssnceceeeeecnecedteeesacceceucunededdeerscecdestuveus e 127 CALCulate FEED Commande 128 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Commande 129 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 135 CONFigure Subsysterm 5 tiet eerte REAA ANARA e sk do dea ncn E ENEE a 165 DISPlay EE einem bia Birnen ER 171 INSTrument subsystem eese eene en nnne annee nennen 177 SENSe TE EEN 177 SENSe CDPower Commande 178 SENSe POWer Commande 183 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manua
252. nel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 208 Spacing Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define the channel spacings for the TX channels and for the adjacent channels e TXchannels left column TX1 2 spacing between the first and the second carrier TX2 3 spacing between the second and the third carrier The spacings between all adjacent TX channels can be defined separately When you change the spacing for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all sub sequent TX channels in order to set up a system with equal TX channel spacing quickly For different spacings a setup from top to bottom is necessary If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution according to the center frequency is as follows Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 60 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RF Measurements Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency Adjacent channels right column Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other the modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same fac tor new spacing valu
253. nel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt e Data Rate kbps Data rate with which the channel is transmitted The data rate is between 17 6 ksps and 281 6 ksps for QPSK modulation and between 26 4 and 422 4 ksps for 8PSK modulation e Mod Shows he modulation type QPSK 8PSK 16QAM or 64QAM e Power dBm Shows the absolute channel power e Power dB Shows the relative channel power The relative channel power is in relation to the total power of the data parts of the signal e MA Shift Shows the midamble shift For code channels this is the shift of the associated mid amble if a common or default midamble allocation is detected The TD SCDMA specifications require that the midamble and its code channels must have the same power The following two parameters show if a common or default mid amble allocation is detected e AMiD1 dB Shows the power offset of the midamble and the sum power of its channels in data part 1 e AMiD2 dB Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 35 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions CE GEMMEMMLOC ESA nn Code Domain Analysis Shows the power offset of the midamble and the sum power of its channels in data part 2 Inactive channels are marked with dashes in the Channel Type DataRate and Mod ulation columns When working with predefined channel
254. nel power measurement In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the query returns the power result for the reference range if this power reference type is selected With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the channel power is out put in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the channel power is output in W CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ State This command switches the query response of the power measurement results between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith The measurement results are output with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters State ON OFF ON Results output channel power density in dBm Hz OFF Results output channel power is displayed in dBm RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 133 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth For details on a complete measurement example refer to CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasType gt This command selects and switches on the specified power measurement type in the window specified by th
255. ng takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 196 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PREMGNEGEEMMCEMGMCUQA Ae ae s un n E SENSe Subsystem Parameters Bandwidth minimum span lt value x span of reference range RST 3 84 MHz Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP BWID 1 MHZ Sets the Tx bandwidth to 1 MHz SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe State This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter This setting only takes effect if channel power is selected as power reference type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 196 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT OFF Deactivates the use of an RRC filter SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa Value This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe command and if the RRC filter is activated SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe command Parameters lt Value gt 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT ON
256. nnel Rho The range is 0 1 Spreading Factor of the channel The range is 1 16 Slot number The range depends on the capture length Data rate is kbps Trigger to Frame in ms This value is valid only after successful synchronization to the TD SCDMA signal When using the Free Run trigger mode the com mand returns a 9 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 2 alias channel The code class of these channels is 4 i e a channel consists of more than one code Query only 224 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 9 1 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Other Commands Referenced in this Manual The following commands are identical to those in the base unit and are included in this manual only because they are specifically referenced here See also chapter 4 6 3 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual on page 184 andchapter 4 2 3 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Man ual on page 135 INPut Commands tectus desee EEN SE DEENEN 225 TRIGger Command iier bs eere edoceri dod de Ed NES daa a da uua 231 Other Referenced Commande 234 INPut commands INPut ATTenuation Value This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against damage from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B2
257. nnel e Cyan inactive channel e Red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel turn red Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 31 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mLAEmEIEC E H n ege Code Domain Analysis When working with predefined channel tables every code is regarded as active Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Power vs Symbol Display Configuration Starts the Power vs Symbol result display This result display shows the power of a specific channel on symbol level The number of symbols on the x axis depends on the spreading factor The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot Power vs Symbol 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 5 50 Sym Stop Sym 43 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Channel Power vs Slot Display Configuration Starts the Channel Power vs Slot result display This result display shows the average power of a specific channel over all captured slots The scaling is either relative or absolute Therefore the unit of the y axis is either dBm or dB By default the display is relative to the mean total power of the data parts of the slot Each bar on the x axis represents one of the captured slots The measurement evaluates a single channel over all slots The currently selected slot
258. nsitive and general help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents e To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign e Todisplay a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed e Tochange to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics e To scroll through a page use t
259. nter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 175 Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 175 Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 230 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 186 IQ Capture Settings This softkey opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 19 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Ins
260. ntrol 227 Digital UO Interface remote control e Digital ME Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Index H Hysteresis Lower Auto level c ccceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeneeeeeteeeeees 43 Upper Auto level eeeeeneenn 43 l IEC IEEE bus Command description eese 125 Inherent noise EOF ER 66 Input Output menu eee 47 102 Input sample rate Klee EE 48 ang e mE 20 IQ Capture Settings Ele 19 K key INPUT OUTBPUT cierre 102 Key INPU T OUTPUT cni tetra 47 L level display range 78 79 88 89 range 78 79 88 89 Level Reference dece ter eee ee e ee Se 19 39 88 Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control 228 Digital lQ ER 48 limit ACLR measurement sseeseeeeee 63 limit check ACLR measurement Lower case commands Lower Level Hysteresis cnl d t 43 M Max Hold trace mode s esse 44 105 menu FOQUONCY uut daaa eene dade 83 RIT 86 SWEEP 99 Menu Bandwidth i c oerte uc te iter rct rta 92 Min Hold trace mode sss 45 106 N Negative Peak detector sss 104 New Copy Edit NC T 24 noise COMECHON co o rccte erect ete tege ae ve 66 SOUICE exterri l en eritis tuus rro dez 48 103 O offset
261. nual 1173 0743 02 06 77 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m a J OOQ H nuen RF Measurements Range Log 100 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log 50 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log 10 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDowc n TRACe t Y SPACing on page 176 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 173 Range Log 5 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TR
262. o FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 217 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 217 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 197 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 101 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mau O J a nes 3 2 7 7 RF Measurements Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurem
263. o TURPE 101 Fk a MM nm 101 Ion mc MUCH 101 EI AME T Mp 102 SWE BEI S 102 Sweep PONS T EDU 102 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 44 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 235 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 235 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 99 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m Rr Y H HHIe RF Measurements This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 235
264. ode Domain Analysis 5 erectio eter e diee eii ERE EES 14 3 1 1 Menu and Softkey Descrtpotton emen 15 3 1 1 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Anahyzer een 16 3 1 1 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Men 38 3 1 1 3 Softkeys of the Amplitude Men 39 3 1 1 4 Softkeys of the Auto Set Men 42 3 1 1 5 Softkeys of the Sweep Menwu iescisseeieeen nennen cedens aate annia dana nnn in 43 3 1 1 6 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements rn 44 3 1 1 7 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurements ceeeeeeeeetcteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 46 3 1 1 8 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements rren 47 3 2 RF Measuremoenits trece eec i etae caeno cR REESEN REESEN EN 51 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 13 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 7 1 3 2 7 2 3 2 7 3 3 2 7 4 3 2 7 5 3 2 7 6 3 2 7 7 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 9 3 3 10 3 3 11 3 1 Code Domain Analysis Signal Channel Power 51 Adjacent Channel Power CH Power ACLR emen 51 Spectrum Emission Mask 52 Occupied Bandwidth sessi essen an arte nn nnns 52 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF eene 53 Power va In 53 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements KOGIK h 54 Softkeys of the Measurement Men 54 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu 83 Softkeys
265. of symbols depends on the spreading factor Spreading Factor 16 44 symbols Spreading Factor 8 88 symbols Spreading Factor 4 176 symbols Spreading Factor 2 352 symbols Spreading Factor 1 704 symbols e Symbol Constellation For the Symbol Constellation result display the command returns one value each for the real and imaginary parts of every symbol re 0 gt im 0 gt re 1 gt im 1 gt re n im n gt The number of symbols depends on the spreading factor Spreading Factor 16 44 symbols Spreading Factor 8 88 symbols Spreading Factor 4 176 symbols Spreading Factor 2 352 symbols Spreading Factor 1 704 symbols e Composite Constellation For the Composite Constellation result display the command returns one value each for the real and imaginary parts of every data chip re 0 gt im 0 gt re 1 im 1 gt re 703 im 703 gt e Bit Stream For the Bitsream result display the command returns the bitstream of one slot i e it returns one value for every bit either O or 1 in a symbol in the following order bit 1 gt bit 2 gt lt bit n gt The number of bits depends on the modulation and the spreading factor Spreading Factor 16 QPSK 88 bits 8PSK 132 bits 16QAM 176 bits 64QAM 264 bits Spreading Factor 8 QPSK 176 bits 8PSK 264 bits 16QAM 352 bits G4QAM 528 bits Spreading Factor 4 QPSK 352 bits 8PSK 528 bits 16QAM 70
266. of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be set to a fraction of the span span gt 0 or a fraction of the resolution bandwidth span 0 or it can be set to a fixed value manually Apart from the Center Marker and Manual softkeys the other softkeys are displayed depending on the selected frequency span This softkey is available for RF measurements 0 1 Span span 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 201 0 1 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the resolution bandwidth This is the default setting Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 201 0 5 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 201 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 201
267. of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt limit line Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem The CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec trum Emission Mask CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits eene 149 GALCulatesn LIMitek ESPectrum MODE 2 reor be int nh ne ddgR aa 4XR eaa RR dde Rma RAS 150 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks E bechumbClass CasszTENClushvel rrenen 150 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClass Cass OUNI 151 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit S TATe sess 151 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cass MANimum 152 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cassz MiNimum 152 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTOre ccccceccccsscceceeecseeeceaceeseeeeeeeseceaceesuseesnees 152 GALGCulatesmsLIMitek ESPectrum VALue 1 et nec tune td x dena SSES 153 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits Limits This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limits gt 1 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 separat
268. oftkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provi ded in the corresponding softkey description e c 83 CPUS SIZ P 84 L 0 Span pah IC NK Ku 84 L QA RBW SR E ER m UU Tm 84 LG 5 S pan span gt EE 84 LO RB span E 85 Lyt Span Spa gt ENERO ET TE m 85 S Wl A ICE 85 cq EE 85 ELI E 85 E NNI RE NUT 85 SIC EE 85 SHOP 86 FREGUGNGY Rer EE 86 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s fcenter E fmax CS spanqi 2 span 0 0 Hz lt center s fmax Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 83 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EGER MPLUO C RA npP9 RF Measurements fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 200 CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 1096
269. og 100 dB eset tntn tata tntattn atate 78 L Range Log 50 UB iude eti ei distante i E tides 78 L Range Log 10 MB oie soni en rima tor bmc mx n eege 78 L Range Log Sdp EE 78 o Log IaB eT 79 ERange Loo EE 79 L Range Linear gg ee EENS 79 EE 79 B 1 31 7 PT 79 V 1 PTT Eeer d 80 E Elf UNT 80 L E arreter eR spesa riesen ebrei dad 80 beluet Geteste OTT 80 L Gated Trigger E 80 Eu 2r 10 BRENT 80 L Adapt to Sag BNET M 81 L Auto Level TH cis esee ct detenta ect ra oae bcd 81 No oj o MMCUM 81 DE 01 EE 82 L Adjust Seths NIU a a 82 POWEr VS HEET 82 L Switching POME EE 82 EE 82 L No OF Subftames ee titre stern Fes irte Edo Due Ert Lec d RR DR 82 L List Evaluatiori EE 83 L Auto E 83 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m RF Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Opens the submenu to configure a code domain analysis The menu is described in chapter 3 1 1 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer on page 16 For details on Code Domain Analysis see chapter 3 1 Code Domain Analysis on page 14 Power Starts the Signal Channel Power measurement in which the power of a single channel is determined For details on screen layout and default values refer to the description of the Signal Channel Power Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASuremen
270. ommand defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio trans mission system If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwidths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 107 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ACH 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan nels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adjacent channel is changed e g channel 3 the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate adjacent channels e g 4 11 is automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 107 Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ALT2 30 kHz Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 204 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Cont
271. ommands MER MCA R J C X X ne m SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel Name This command defines a name for the adjacent channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Parameters Name RST Adj Example POW ACH NAME ACH XYZ Defines the name of the adjacent channel as XYZ SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate channel Name This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Name RST ALT 1 11 Example POW ACH NAME ALT3 XYZ Defines the name of the third alternate channel as XYZ SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channel Name This command defines a name for the specified TX channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 12 the TX channel Parameters Name RST TX lt 1 12 gt Example POW ACH NAME CHAN3 XYZ Defines the name of the third transmission channel as XYZ SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet lt Setting gt This command adjusts the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detec tor as required for the number of channels the channel bandwidths and the channel spacings selected in the active power measurement If necessa
272. on Starts the Channel Bitstream result display The result display provides information on the demodulated bits All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid by means of dashes For 64QAM modu lation is displayed for 16QAM modulation for 8PSK and for QPSK The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot Bitstream Table 1 Clrw rirf1o 11 10 11 oo For 10 10 11 11 For for or 01 otoo tD EGERECOESREOSETSESOBCIRESET SERE RN 00 11 01 00 oo O1 10 11 11 11 11 11 10 00 11 En Select a specific symbol using the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list Depending on the spreading factor symbol rate of the channel a slot may contain a minimum of 44 and a maximum of 704 symbols In case of an active transmit diversity Antenna Diversity the values reduce to the half Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following bits QPSK 2bits 8PSK 3 bits 16QAM 4 bits 64QAM 6 bits Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Composite Constellation Display Configuration Starts the Composite Constellation result display This result display shows the constellation of the modulated signal at chip level For each of the 1536 chips a constellation point is displayed in the di
273. on e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix Printer Interface Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are descri bed here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and pro gramming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also provided Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 7 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Preface Documentation Overview In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on
274. or precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B5 The Power Sensor Support firmware option R amp S FSV K9 provides the power mea surement functions for this test setup This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Power Sensor R amp S FSV K9 is installed For details see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 237 Further Information Detector e NET 104 Trace Mode Overvlew eene nnnennnnnnn nnn sse tras nsns s EEan Enan dada 105 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type 107 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 103 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters 107 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Geitngs eene rennen 109 3 3 6 ASCII File Export Fommat Ir enr nn nens nensis 110 3 3 7 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML FEles esse 111 3 3 8 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 116 3 3 9 Fast Spectrum Emission
275. ote Control Commands SENSe Subsystem Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep EGATe State This command switches on off the sweep control by an external gate signal If the external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as well In case of measurement with external gate the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several times The synchronization mechanisms with OPC OPC and WAI remain completely unaf fected The sweep end is detected when the required number of measurement points 691 in Spectrum mode has been recorded Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 us SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 us INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt DelayTime gt This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the continu ation of the sweep Note Using gate mode level see SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE on page 215 and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on pag
276. ote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote con trol Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON R amp S FSV K76 K77 List of Commands List of Commands Ee Eelere 234 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FEUNGCionFilxedRbOmt 135 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFl edRbOmty eene 136 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FUNGCionFixedtGTATel nenne 136 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHonPhNOtse AUTO 137 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe essen 137 CALCulate cnz DEI Tamarker mz LINK ee ennen enint nennen nnn nnts sen rnt dnte nnns nnn rnt nnn 138 CAL Culate nz DEI TamarkerzmzMAximum LEET 138 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT 138 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt 139 CAlCulate nz D I Tamarker mz MAXimumf PDEART nennen nennen 139 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET 139 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmumNENT enne ennt nnns nn ennn retentis sena 140 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum RIGHLE essent enne tenen nnn 140 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmumf PDEART enne enne nnne nnne 140 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CALCulate n DEETamarker mo X eerta fue avil
277. ow Parameters lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATe lt Trace gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt Trace gt 1 6 Selects the trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example AVER OFF Switches off the average calculation for trace 1 AVER STAT3 ON Switches on the average calculation for trace 3 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 218 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands Status Reporting System of the TD SCDMA Measurement Applications K76 K77 4 7 Status Reporting System of the TD SCDMA Measure ment Applications K76 K77 Detailed information on the status registers of the base system is given in section Status Reporting System In this section only the new and altered status registers for the TD SCDMA options K76 K77 are described The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains information on the error situation in the code domain analysis of the TD SCDMA option The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt
278. ower classes Up to four different power classes can be defined For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 67 and the corresponding parameter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 3 4 The Range element This element is embedded in the PowerClass element It contains the settings infor mation of the range There have to be at least three defined ranges one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range The maximum number of ranges is 20 Note that the R amp S FSV uses the same ranges in each power class There fore the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class An exception are the Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class Note also that there are two Limit nodes to be defined one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 67 and the corre sponding parameter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 3 5 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R amp S FSV to interpret the file or not Since the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables
279. perating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 153 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position i e in descending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode If no maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200
280. plitudes the video bandwidth is automat ically set to 10 MHz The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 197 of Samples CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples on page 161 Scaling CCDF Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x and y axis x Axis Ref Level Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit dBm dByV etc The function of this softkey is identical to the Ref Level softkey in the Amplitude menu see Ref Level on page 19 For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel on page 163 x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens the Range submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the statistics measurement selected Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe on page 163 Operating Ma
281. r RESUult DH 133 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonb OWer GEI ect 134 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of the code domain measurement Refer to the Code Domain Analysis result display for a detailed description of all results Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Query parameters lt ResultType gt ACTive ARCD CDPabsolute CDPRelative CHANnel CERror EVMPeak EVMRMS IQIMbalance IQOFfset MACCuracy PCDerror PCDer ror PD1 PD2 PDATa PMIDamble RHO SFACtor SLOT SRATe TFRame ACTive Returns the number of active channels ARCD Returns the Average Relative Code Domain Error CDPabsolute Returns the absolute channel power in dBm CDPRelative Returns the relative channel power in dB CHANnel Returns the current channel number CERror Returns the Chip Rate Error in ppm EVMPeak Returns the maximum Error Vector Magnitude of the selected channel EVMRMS Returns the average Error Vector Magnitude of the selected chan nel IQIMbalance Returns the IQ Imbalance in 96 IQOFfset Returns the IQ Offset in 96 MACCuracy Returns the Composite EVM in 96 PCDerror Returns the Peak Code Domain Error dB PD1 Returns the power of the slot s data part 1 in dBm PD2 Returns the power of the slot s data part 2 in dBm PDATa Returns the average power of the data parts in dBm
282. r one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Start Value numeric value Power limit at start frequency Yes Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc Sets the unit of the start dBr dB value Stop Value numeric value Power limit at stop frequency Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc Setstheunitofthe stop value Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 115 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand LimitFailMode Absolute Relative If used it has to be identical No Absolute and Rela to DefaultLimitFailMode tive Absolute or Relative RBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz gt RBW on page 68 Yes Type NORM PULS No CFIL RRC VBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz VBW on page 68 Yes Detector NEG POS SAMP If used it has to be identical No RMS AVER in all ranges QUAS Sweep Mode Manual Auto Sweep Time Mode Yes on page 68 Time time in sec Sweep Time on page 68 No Amplitude No ReferenceLevel Value power in dBm Ref Level on page 68 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes if the Refer enceLevel node is used RFAttenuation Mode Manual Auto RF Att Mode on page 68 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF Preamp on page 69 Yes 3 3 8 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement You ca
283. r samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 232 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 3 2 7 7 Softkeys of the Input Out put Menu for RF Measurements on page 102 PULA ODO DEE 47 e 48 ences 48 E nic o MONTI 48 L Connected Device eerte tritt tnt tt t tte tr tcs 48 L Input Sample ale ttai aecenas EES 48 mil c foc TER 48 i eM Hec ER 48 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 49 no cile DR 49 DA E XJ T a 49 L TX SetiNj CONDERE T 49 d i E 49 o 1 PM 49 L ll 50 L R amp S ouppon EE 50 EE 50 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 226 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 47 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument
284. rating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 143 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands M AA CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate lt n
285. re the same as for the base unit see the description there Importing and Exporting UO Data As of firmware version 1 60 I Q data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K76 K77 and captured UO data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 15 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 3 1 1 5 3 1 1 6 3 1 1 7 3 1 1 8 3 1 1 1 Code Domain Analysis Softkeys of the Code Domain Anahyzer 16 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu 38 Softkeys of the Amplitude Men 39 Softkeys of the Auto Set Men 42 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 43 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements n 44 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurement cc cceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaas 46 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements ree 47 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Code Domain Analyzer menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE measurement applications You can also access the main menu using the MEAS CONFIG hardkey E ET 17 Frontend STUNG MI S 18 Do T EX 18 L Frequency Offset 19 Eeer 19 2 15 1 5 p 19 E 4 NN ETE 19 EE do PI TORTE 19 IQ Capiuro Sollligs EE 19 o p e 20 L Capture Longi sees tee ttp tope d pd Ragusii ences Laid sa
286. refore in possible synchronization errors for code domain measure ments This measurement result is also valid if the R amp S FSV could not synchronize to the TD SCDMA signal e Trigger to Frame Reflects the time offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first slot In case of triggered data recording this corresponds to the timing offset frame trigger trigger offset start of first PCG If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSV to the TD SCDMA signal this measurement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed Slot Result Slot Result Summary Display Configuration The Slot Results show results measured over all channels and one specific slot e PData Shows the average power of the slot s data parts e PD1 D2 Shows the power for each of the slot s data parts e P Midamble Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 33 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions b ew Code Domain Analysis Shows the power for the slot s midamble e Average RCDE Shows the average RCDE Relative Code Domain Error The Average RCDE is calculated according to release 8 of the standard e Active Channels Shows the number of active channels in the slot e Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FSV The absolute frequency
287. rol Commands MC MALO R c w A s ag SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate chan nel 3 to 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel lt channel gt Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX chan nel Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the TX channel 3 to 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel State This command activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ACH ON Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 205 R amp S FSV K76
288. rs are displayed in 9o referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default setting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 176 Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 230 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet I
289. ructured as follows lt PowerClass Index n gt lt StartPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag true Value StartPowerValue gt lt StopPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Value StopPowerValue gt lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Limit Fail Mode lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Range Index n gt lt For contents of the Range node see table 3 5 gt lt Define up to twenty Range nodes gt lt Range gt lt PowerClass gt e The Range element is structured as follows Range Index n gt lt Name Name gt lt ChannelType gt Channel Type lt Channel Type gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt Type gt FilterType lt Type gt lt RollOffFactor gt Factor lt RollOffFactor gt lt Bandwith gt Bandwidth lt Bandwidth gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Start gt RangeStart lt Start gt lt Stop gt RangeStop lt Stop gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Limit gt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt lt Limit gt Start Unit 2 Unit Value Value gt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 113 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m MI Y OO OU Y Further Information RBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Type FilterType lt VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth gt l
290. ry adjacent channel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment To obtain correct results a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 207 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands MGR ML R an d d s m SENSe Subsystem The result is queried with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Parameters Setting ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO Example POW ACH PRES ACP Sets the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the ACLR measurement INIT CONT OFF Switches over to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP Queries the result of the adjacent channel power measurement SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and if required switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded Since the measurement bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measure ments the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below
291. s are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 126 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 2 3 3 CALCulate Subsystem lt Boolean gt This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 numeric value num These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value e DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e uP This keyword increments the parameter value e DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by add ing the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum
292. s Max Value remote control y Axis Min Value m y Unit 96 ADS iriri rins y Unit Abs remote control Zero Span remote control ssssssssse Softkey Pom M 96 101 Auto Freq Auto Level 5 Gern rrt rra 42 Le 45 106 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control Center remote control sss 200 E Ee EE 84 Clear Write Close Sweep List A 70 Continue Single Sweep ssssuuss 44 99 Continuous Sweep Continuous Sweep remote control 235 Cont Meas remote Control Decim Sep remote control ifs T IR ls Uer TEE EL Atten remote control sssssssss EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 229 230 El Atten On Off A 41 91 EX IQ BOX de EE FET Filter MOd6 ent rere Frequency Offset remote control Frontend Settings inaina F l Span T ena an aea EE AEEA IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control Se IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 232 Input AC DC senes 41 47 92 103 Input AC DC remote control 226 Marker 1 to 4 remote control 142 158 248 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Index Marker to Trace remote control
293. s available for RF measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 202 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 202 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Span menu for RF meas urements except for Power and Power vs Time measurements NIE D m 86 Sweeptime Mant al deck iced e eto nne neant hne Ere nnn anie nh ne RENE NENNEN eue RR qo eech 87 FESPA eT T 87 Last e DEEN 87 Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span The center frequency remains the same when you change the span The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 Spanmin S f span S f max fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 202 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 86 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 3 2 7 4 RF Measurements Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span
294. s in the PowerClass 31 39 xml file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution Value This command sets the RBW value for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 30 0 kHz Example ESP RANG2 BAND RES 5000 Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo Value This command sets the VBW value for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 10 0 MHz Example ESP RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNt This command returns the number of defined ranges Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 189 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PRENNE A TV M nn SENSe Subsystem Suffix range 1 20 range Example ESP RANG COUNt Returns the number of defined ranges SEN
295. s or down wards The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the RBW display in the channel bar This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth ESolution AUTO on page 197 ESolution on page 197 DI Ww Res BW Auto Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span for span gt 0 If you change the span the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a particular span Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 93 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions ma Y YU O V RF Measurements This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Occupied Band width and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 197 Video BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possi
296. ses together Only power classes for which limits are defined are available for selection If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used The limits assigned to that power class are applied see PMin PMax on page 73 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 150 To define all limits in one step CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe on page 151 PMin PMax Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Defines the level limits for each power class The range always starts at 200 dBm INF and always stops at 200 dBm INF These fields cannot be modified If more than one Power Class is defined the value of PMin must be equal to the value of PMax of the last Power Class and vice versa Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit but must be lower than the upper limit Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 73 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EGER MPLUO R T J K sn e RF Measurements Daf Deen Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum on page 152
297. set tling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth It is also available for Power vs Time measure ments Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 199 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 94 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m E IH RF Measurements Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep
298. signal source for measurements Parameters Source RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN 4 9 2 TRIGger Commands TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 231 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands mm J Osw Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power tri
299. softkeys available in the Amplitude menu of the TD SCDMA BTS and UE measurement application for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements The softkeys in the Amplitude menu for CDA and Power vs Time measurements are described in chapter 3 1 1 3 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu on page 39 iit TE 88 RI me 88 L Ene Log TON EL oup Surita ten ae ecce n dictt dtu ad 88 dl 0 Log I dB NERA 88 L Range Log 10 oio erepta i ara HR RN Ci EAR te HEN 89 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 87 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m U He RF Measurements Gebees eege eege 89 Get Elte 89 L Range Loo Manis ertet sea decenni abet oes este ee 89 L Range Linear 946 oc pbi rtu eegal Sege 89 53 0 15 37 MEC ME 90 Preamp er TELE 90 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 90 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 91 El Stee iech ees idee s e eege ien aa aida aea AEAEE 91 El Atten Mode Auto Man niter redet dent dee te d d te Lud dde dodi 91 PRET LGV 6r I m M 92 Ref EI dieci T aaea a a aaa a aa 92 GHT ADSR EE 92 jue CAC DEE 92 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dByV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this valu
300. ss one of the buttons on the touchscreen Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier On e ott Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 E fcenter E fmax SPAN min 2 Span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter s fmax 2S Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 18 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions CLOS s o H mns Code Domain Analysis fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 200 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 202 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to e
301. sse 43 Upper Level Hysteresis sese 43 Spar minu deep ferire aed e wal eden Ye 86 Special characters s esee 126 Spectrum Emission Mask Power Class8S innere repetiit rien 73 Start MOQUGNCY E 85 Step size Center frequency ecceecceeceeeeceeeeeeeteeeneeeeeeeeeetees 84 stop frequency supply voltage external noise source 48 103 sweep op 44 102 Sweep Continue single sweep sss 44 99 Continuous RI me Uu sweep list Fast SEM remote control n eeen 187 Sweep List Symmeltrical EE 70 SWOeODIebli eoaco eet eg eee vote bobo ico ren retibus 99 Sweep time COUpIING E 95 100 Sync settings phase reference s sss phase rotations 2 Scrambling Code b ec er eee Sync Settings EU EE 22 Sync To Sync Settings Ki 181 Sync Settings KIT 182 T trace power measurement sss esses 64 Trace Clear Wite d 44 105 TRACe 1 4 DATA erronis as 220 Trace mode e m ean re EE 45 106 Blank Clear Write ON oe WEE Min Hold M E E E A trigger Gel 21 46 Trigger succo 21 46 Trigger Source External SONKEY sanse 21 46 Trigger Source Free Run GEI 21 46 TX Settings EIERE Jq H 49 U Upper case commands esee 126 Upper Level Hyst
302. strument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chapters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all available options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is installed on Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 8 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Preface PRG MCU R J ymegeg 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elemen
303. t Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 irrelevant irrelevant 1 4 the power class to be evaluated ON OFF RST OFF 150 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt 1 to4 RST 1 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe State This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 151 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Re
304. t Detector gt Detector lt Detector gt lt Sweep Mode SweepMode lt Amplitude gt lt ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value gt lt RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value 2 Value Preamplifier State State gt lt Amplitude gt lt Range gt Time SweepTime gt Table 3 3 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Table 3 4 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand FileFormatVersion 1 0 0 0 Yes Date YYYY MM DD Date in ISO 8601 format No HH MM SS Name lt string gt Name of the standard Yes Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No Application SA K72 K82 Name of the application No LinkDirection Name Downlink Uplink Yes None ShortName DL UL No Reference Yes Power Method TX Channel Power Yes TX Channel Peak Power Reference lt string gt No Channel Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand StartPower Value lt power in dBm gt The start power must be equal Yes to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power value of the first range is 200 Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value lt power in dBm gt The stop power must be equal Yes to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Unit dBm Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 11
305. t FREQuency This command defines the center frequency automatically by determining the highest level in the frequency span Example ADJ FREQ Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 185 4 6 3 2 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Example ADJ LEV SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem The SENSe ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands to configure Spec trum Emission Mask SEM measurements ISENSe JE SPec iun WIL ciere r e i ea eaae x ape eet ee 186 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe essere enn 187 SENSe J ESPectr mFIETerERROLALEPHA 22 2 2 2I aa aa aaia 187 ISENSe JES Pectin HONS PESE iiia ea aaia a AaS iai RAE a EE 187 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet S TANdard eseesssssssssesesenee nennen enne 188 EE TIR EN KC 188 SENS amp ESP ctrumiPRESetSTORe 21 imei Latro e RERBA NEGER Tiaa bah 189 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth RE SGolutton re rerseerese nene 189 IGENGe IEGbechum RANGe zangez BANDwidtb Vleo eene 189 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNL nennen eene nnne nnne 189 SENSe ESPectrum RANGes lt range gt DELete nennen 190 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt ran
306. t on page 169 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 130 Adapt to Signal Power Opens a submenu to configure the measurEment with the following softkeys Auto Level amp Time Adapt to Signal Power The Auto Level and Time softkey automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSV Current measurements are aborted when pressing the softkey and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 183 Start Slot Adapt to Signal Power Sets the first slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STarT on page 183 Stop Slot Adapt to Signal Power Sets the last slot of the measurement Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 183 Ch Power ACLR Starts the Adjacent Channel Power measurement In this measurement the power of the carrier and its adjacent and alternate channels is determined For details on screen layout and default values see the description of the Adjacent Channel Power CH Power ACLR Also opens the Adjacent Channel Power submenu Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 169 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 130 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 57 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mu MO
307. t setting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t Y SPACing on page 176 Range Lin Unit x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 176 y Axis Max Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 164 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 79 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions m K JV H H RF Measurements y Axis Min Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range Val ues in the range fe value 0 1 are allowed The y axis scaling is defined via
308. te gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of eval uation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 234 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands mm C S Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using max hold or averaging functions In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as resu
309. th subevstem eene 196 4 6 3 4 SENSe FREQuency subesvsiem eee 200 4 6 3 5 SENSe POWer subevetem eene nnne enne 203 4 6 3 6 SENSe SWEep subsvstem eene nennen nennen enne 212 4 6 3 7 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem een 218 4 7 Status Reporting System of the TD SCDMA Measurement Applications K76 K77 SEET CERS 219 AS TRACe Subsystem tH AARAA AAN AAAA A 220 4 99 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eene 225 49 1 NPutcommarnds 2 5 EE eee Lane seed iura i nde e ee 225 4 9 2 TRlGger Commands iet te desde died Ande SEA EENS 231 4 9 3 Other Referenced Commands esie sese enhanced haha aka Leia 234 BE lSedeo nur M 239 j fe eee 245 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 5 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows e Quick Start Guide e Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general informati
310. that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 104 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions 0 3 3 2 Further Information Number of measured values During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSV increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscillator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the precision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default number of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sw
311. the command returns depends on the capture length e Peak Code Domain Error For the Peak Code Domain Error result display the command returns two values in the following order Power vs Slot Absolute slot level in dbm validity The number of pairs the command return depends on the capture length e Composite EVM For the Composite EVM result display the command returns two values for every slot in the following order slot 0 gt maccuracy 0 slot n gt maccuracy n gt The number of pairs the command return depends on the capture length Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 221 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands PEG GEEMMCUNMMCUQ n nq TRACe Subsystem e Symbol EVM For the Symbol EVM result display the command returns one value for each symbol value in symbol 0 value in symbol 1 gt value in symbol n gt The number of symbols depends on the spreading factor Spreading Factor 16 44 symbols Spreading Factor 8 88 symbols Spreading Factor 4 176 symbols Spreading Factor 2 352 symbols Spreading Factor 1 704 symbols e Power vs Symbol For the Power vs Symbol result display the command returns one value for each symbol value in dom symbol 0 value in dbm symbol 1 value in symbol n The number
312. the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Note the rules for the Frequency parameter specified in chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Frequency numeric value RST 250 0 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 2 52 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG1 STAR 100000000 Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range For further details refer to the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt command Note the rules for the lt Frequency gt parameter specified in chapter 3 3 5 Ranges and Range Settings on page 109 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG3 STOP 10000000 Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation Value This command sets the attenuation for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 187 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Operating M
313. time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 217 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 217 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 217 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweeping e Sweep on page 96 e FFT on page 96 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 e Auto on page 96
314. tion Type Shows the modulation type of the channel Channel Table Display Configuration Starts the Channel Table result display This result display shows all channels of the signal The sorting of the channels depends on the Result Settings e Sorting by code means that the midambles are listed first followed by the active data channels Inactive channels are listed at the end of the table Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 34 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mI U MT C H Code Domain Analysis The R amp S FSV sorts midambles according to their midamble shifts Active and inactive channels are projected to a SF of 16 and sorted according to their code numbers e Sorting by midamble means that after each midamble the corresponding code is listed The R amp S FSV automatically distinguishes between common and default mid amble allocation The allocation of code to midamble is specified in the TD SCDMA standard If neither a common nor a default midamble allocation is found sorting is in code order The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Channel Table 1 Clrw Channel Walsh DataRate Power Power AMiD1 AMiD2 P Type Ch SF ksps dBm dB dB dB Midamble 34 1 1 1 BEL CNN a NS CSS For the Code Domain Power measurement the following parameters are determined for the channels e Channel Type Shows the channel type e Walsh SF Chan
315. tion does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description Behaviour of the MEAS CONFIG key The MEAS CONFIG key always returns to the root menu of the currently active mea surement Code NBI Pi IIT 57 SEN 57 E A NENNEN 57 L Auto bevel Dun NERO EP aa 57 EE 57 mio RNC 57 BPG PG EI MED 57 roo rii SENINGS ETE EE ee 58 L2 ol TX Chal EE 58 Er Ad Le MENU 58 BE 0 Po EE 58 L Bandwidil c escteiee tec Eege 59 L AOLR Refaterigg uic ier niit recte si etate denas 60 M c1 NTC 60 eh EEN 61 L Weighting eg eege EA eeg Aerer 61 E35 0 WU 62 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 54 RF Measurements Mie MANNA RERO RECAP 62 Relative Limie casei a Der a Ma aS are 63 L Absolute Imi cei conteret d mre 63 B orc EP Em 63 d 1 MANC 63 L Power Mode 63 Mi nul MEC SP uesicamssindashdnalsdayacsiobivesin nse 64 E 64 L 0 4 ARN 64 Kategorien erbei ere 64 L Adjust Della atr err punte dix aee taken n iege 64 DE ONU RERO EE 64 EE 65 L Set CP Reterence ener tne testet ttes stets sts 65 L Noise orte eoa erai pde cis md dada ibd ad cR dtd d ag 66 L Adapt to Sna MIETEN Em 66 L Auto Level wp LH 66 C Siart SOli e a r G 66 Loo 1 E SE EE A E 66 ee NEE RE 66 E 1 eee 67 L Sweep List dialog buerger radici rni 67 L Range Start Range Sl p ueeseienittttt entes eina 67 u
316. tion using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SG amp DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DigIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURce EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 50 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions RF Measurements 3 2 RF Measurements 3 2 1 Signal Channel Power The Signal Channel Power measurement analyses the power of the RF signal One trace shows the evaluation of a single channel with a bandwidth of 1 2288 MHz The results are based on the root mean square Below the measurement screen the bandwidth and associated channel power are dis played The other screen elements match those of the spectrum analyzer in the base unit The configuration of the measurement and the default settings comply to the TD SCDMA requirements Parameter Default Value Frequency Spa
317. tomatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW See DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE on page 172 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 172 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 106 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions Further Information 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The following filter types are available e Normal 3dB Gaussian filters The Gaussian filters are set by default The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet e CISPR 6 dB filters MIL Std 6 dB filters Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel filters For details see chapter 3 3 4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters
318. trument Functions Code Domain Analysis Common Settings Invert Q On e otf Data Capture Settings Capture Length 7 1 Set Count Set To Analyze Trigger Settings Trigger Source External 6 Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive Negative Trigger Offset 0 0s Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 180 Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the slots The default value is 7 The maximum capture length is 63 The Capture Length field is available if Set Count equals 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 178 Set Count IQ Capture Settings Defines the number of consecutive sets to be stored in the instrument s IQ memory One set consists of 63 slots The R amp S FSV can capture up to 6300 slots in a single sweep i e the possible value range is from 1 to 100 sets The default setting is 1 In that case you can still define the number of slots In case you want to capture more than one set the capture length is always 63 The R amp S FSV auto matically sets the capture length to 63 and the Capture Length field is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 181 Set to Analyze IQ Capture Settings Sel
319. ts on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 9 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Preface mm ut How to Use the Help System 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context se
320. ts the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 217 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 100 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions MGE H a RF Measurements This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweeping e Sweep on page 96 FFT on page 96 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 3 3 3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 107 e Auto on page 96 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 217 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type t
321. ttings Initiates a measurement in Channel Search Mode on page 24 mode The measurement results are applied to the active channel table The active channel table is overwritten without further notice The softkey is only available if you have selected the Auto Search mode in the Channel Table Settings dialog box Select Slot New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Selects the slot for which the channel table is valid Sort Midamble New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Sets the Result Settings to midamble order This softkey is available for the 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS Measurement Application Sort Code New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Sets the Result Settings to Code order Reload New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Reloads the original content of the copied channel table This softkey is available for the New Channel Table dialog box and the Edit Channel Table dialog box Save New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Saves the table under its specified name in the xml format If you edit a channel table and want to keep the original channel table change the name of the edited channel table before saving it Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 26 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions PEG GPCUNMMCUQ R ge Code Domain Analysis Delete Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected chann
322. tured slot The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected slot turns red Composite EVM 1 Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 6 Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the composite EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 128 Peak Code Domain Error Display Configuration Starts the Peak Code Domain Error result display The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Error for all codes That means that in this result display the Code Domain Error on page 31 is projected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor In the diagram each bar of the x axis repre sents one captured slot The selected slot turns red The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected slot turns red Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 30 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions mAEmIEm
323. uence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURCce Source This command selects the trigger source For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 233 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands e X H H I T S 4 9 3 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency RFPower Power trigger at the first intermediate frequency TIME Time interval PSEN External power sensor requires R amp S FSV K9 option RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Other Referenced Commands ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Mode all DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Sta
324. um MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent channels uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a ref erence channel SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual lt ChannelNumber gt This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in rel ative adjacent channel power measurements The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 134 Parameters lt ChannelNumber gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 3 Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference channel SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel ADJ The modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel to 33 kHz the alter
325. um value to the left of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 155 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary If no minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excur sion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X direction If no next higher
326. urned for every code So for example consider the following configuration three active channels out of a total of 12 DPCH 1 16 CC4 7 0 dB DPCH 2 8 CC3 7 3 dB DPCH 3 4 CC2 8 0 dB In this example the command would return the following string active channels in bold 4 1 54 5 1 4 2 55 1 0 3 2 56 3 1 4 3 56 2 1 4 Bp 956 2954 0 4 6 55 8 0 4 T 957 05 0 4 9 56 7 0 2 3 56 2 1 4 10 56 5 1 4 11 55 8 1 4 12 55 9 1 4 13 55 8 0 4 14 56 3 0 4 15 55 9 0 4 16 57 3 0 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 220 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands TRACe Subsystem e Channel Table For the Channel Table result display the command returns 11 values in the following order lt channel type gt lt code class gt lt code number gt lt modulation type gt lt absolute level in dBm gt relative level in dB midamble shift gt lt midd1 gt lt midd1 gt lt reserved1 gt lt reserved2 gt The output depends on the channel sorting order When using code sorting order all midambles are output first then control channels and last the data channels When using midamble sorting order each midamble is output with its corresponding control and data channel So for example consider the following configuration three active channels in com mon midamble allocation Midamble m 3 3 0 dBm DPCH 1 16 QPSK 7 78 dB
327. vel defines the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 228 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 228 Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 48 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions EGER MCLOQR n mnn ge Code Domain Analysis Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change OCCUIS Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 227 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes e Device identification e Used port e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output trans fer rates e Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 226 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog bo
328. ven probability If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Note The command is only available for CCDF measurements You can query the asso ciated level value with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Probability gt Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Example CALC1 MARK Y PERC 95PCT Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 CALCulate PSE subsystem CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate sese 159 CAL Culate n PEAKssarch PSEarchr AU TQ i oreet edere abuses e eva REA PA REENEN 160 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbpGtarch MAI 160 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow esses enne nennen 160 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarch GUlDbanges eene 160 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate This command switches the spurious limit check off If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit you have to Switch on the limit again This command is only for FSP compatibility and not necessary to use on the R amp S FSV Suffix n irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 159 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC PSE Starts to determine the list CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO lt State gt This com
329. veral measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 3 3 1 Detector Overview on page 104 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER See DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 172 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV au
330. x for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digital UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Module Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital output to a connected device Transmitter Type RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 49 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Instrument Functions
331. xample CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement The following values are set x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt lt ResultType gt This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt Trace gt 1 6 trace Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN PEAK CFACtor ALL MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor The required result is selected via the following parameters Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 162 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm pe
332. xt Peak remote control 155 156 Noise Correction Noise SOUPE ic ihnen rirar Noise Src On Off remote control OBW remote control sess 134 Peak remote control n eerren 139 154 Percent Marker Percent Marker remote control 159 Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control 136 137 Ph Noise On Off remote control dei Power Mode nnt reete Ee Ree Power Mode remote control ssssssse R amp S SUppott coire in estet Operating Manual 1173 0743 02 06 247 R amp S FSV K76 K77 Range EE Range Lins Unit 2 iere refert Range Lin Unit remote control Range Linear 96 annee etn treten Range Linear 96 remote control Range Log remote control Range Log 100 dp Range Log 10 dB sssssssseesse Range Log 1 dB Range Log 50 dB sssssssse Range Log 5 dB TER Range Log Manual RBW VBW Manual RBW VBW Noise 10 seen RBW VBW Pulse 1 oi RBW VBW Sine TT Recall remote control ssssssssss Reference Position remote control S Ref Level remote control ssssssss Ref Level Offset enne Ref Level Offset remote control 175 Ref Level Position nre Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Fr

R&S®FSV-K76/K77 3GPP TD-SCDMA - rohde

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSV-K76/K77 3GPP TD-SCDMA - rohde

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSV-K76/K77 3GPP TD-SCDMA - rohde